2008 quest owner's manual

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and complete trip foryou and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to driv-ing and avoid using vehicle features ortaking other actions that could distractyou.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manualfor important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting from modi-fications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Quest (van)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)06/29/07—debbie X

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL


CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-ies, may contain perchlorate material. Thefollowing advisory is provided: “PerchlorateMaterial – special handling may apply, Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTHt is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toXanavi InformaticsCorporation.

© 2007 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.


NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM


Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9


1. 3rd row bench center seat belt(P. 1-15)

2. 3rd row bench seat belts (P. 1-15)3. Top tether strap anchor points (P. 1-30)4. 2nd row captain’s chair seat belts

(P. 1-15)5. Front seat belts (P. 1-15)6. Roof mounted curtain side-impact air

bag (P. 1-52)7. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(if so equipped) (P. 1-52)8. Seats (P. 1-2)9. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-59)10. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-64)11. Top tether strap anchor for vehicles

without 2nd or 3rd row seats (P. 1-31)12. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags (P. 1-52)13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-28)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0073

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Z REVIEW COPY—2008 Quest (van)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)06/29/07—cathy X

1. Engine hood (P. 3-14)2. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-18)3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)4. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-16)5. Windshield (P. 8-17)6. Power windows (P. 2-36)7. Door locks, keyfob, keys

(P. 3-3, 3-9, 3-2)8. Mirrors (P. 3-23)9. Tire pressure (P. 9-11)10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)11. Tire chains (P. 8-37)12. Fog light switch (P. 2-22)13. Tie down/towing hooks (P. 6-12)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0074

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-18)2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)3. Lift gate (P. 3-14)4. Lift gate release (P. 3-18)5. Rear view monitor (if so equipped)

(P.4-28)6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-19, P. 9-3)8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-19)9. Sliding doors (P. 3-5, P. 3-6)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0075

EXTERIOR REAR



1. DVD entertainment system(if so equipped) (P. 4-65)

2. Personal lights (P. 2-42)3. Skyview roof (if so equipped) (P. 2-39)4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-40)5. Map lights (P. 2-43),

Console light P.2-44)6. Sun visors (P. 3-22)7. HomeLinkT (if so equipped) (P. 2-44)8. Glove box (P. 2-30)9. Seats (P. 1-2)10. Center tray table (if so equipped)

(P. 2-29)11. Armrest (P.1-9)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0076

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Ventilators (P. 4-30)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-18)3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/BluetoothT hands-free phonesystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-62)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-52, P. 2-24)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-13)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-16, 2-17)

8. Display screen/Navigation system*(P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P. 1-52)

10. Glove box (P. 2-30)11. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-60)12. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23)13. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-40)14. Audio system controls (P. 4-43)15. Display screen/Navigation system*

controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)16. Power outlets (P. 2-26)LIC0928

INSTRUMENT PANEL



17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-8)18. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)19. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-21)20. Rear sonar system off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-25)21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) or TractionControl System (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-25, P. 2-25)

22. Lights on demand switch (P. 2-41)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.



1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)3. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)5. Battery (P. 8-13)6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-20)7. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11)8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)10. Drive belt location (P. 8-14)11. Fuse block (P. 8-20)12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)13. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WDI0515

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS) warn-ing light

2-8

or

Brake warning light 2-8

Charge warninglight

2-8

Door open warninglight

2-8

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-9

Low fuel warninglight

2-9

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-9

Warninglight

Name Page

Low windshieldwasher fluid warninglight

2-10

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-10

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-10

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Automatic transmis-sion position indica-tor light

2-11

Cruise main switchindicator light

2-11

Cruise set switchindicator light

2-11

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-11

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Malfunction Indica-tor Light (MIL)

2-11

Overdrive off indica-tor light

2-11

Front passenger airbag status light

2-11

Security indicatorlight

2-12

Slip indicator light 2-12

Traction ControlSystem off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-12

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-13

Vehicle DynamicControl off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-13

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS




MEMO

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42nd row captain’s chair adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Front-Seat Active Head Restraints(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25

Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrenSYSTEM (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30Child restraint installation using LATCH-2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 1-33Child restraint installation using LATCH-3rd row bench seat (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36Child restraint installation using the seatbelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

Seat Fold/Adjust Summary

Position: Operation/page:

1st row All (P. 1-2)

2nd row

Forward/backward adjust (P. 1-6)Recline (P. 1-6)Tip-up for 3rd row entry (P. 1-7)Folding for cargo (P. 1-10)

3rd rowRecline (P. 1-7)Folding (P.1-12)Stow (P.1-12)

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped and the transmission is in P (Park).

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height ofthe seat cushion to the desired position.

WRS0520 WRS0521 WRS0131

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backwardMoving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

RecliningMove the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

WRS0518 WRS0522



The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P(Park).

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’sseat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or downto adjust the seat lumbar area.

WRS0523 WRS0518



2ND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRADJUSTMENT

Forward and backward

WARNING

● The 2nd row seats are heavy. Be carefulwhen folding and unfolding.

● To avoid injury to yourself and others,keep hands and body clear whenfolding.

While seated, pull the levers1 and hold it whileyou slides2 the seat forward or backward to thedesired position. Release the lever to lock theseat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull up on the lever andlean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for addedcomfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in thissection). Also, the seatback can be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

WRS0705 LRS0625



Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd rowThe 2nd row captain’s chairs can be tipped for-ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row benchseat. To enter the 3rd row bench seat , lift up onthe lever located on the lower base of the 2ndrow captain’s chair to tip the seat forward. To exitthe 3rd row bench seat, pull back on the lever onthe lower base of the 2nd row captain’s chair andpush the seat forward.

3RD ROW BENCH SEATADJUSTMENT

RecliningLift up on the latch in the center of the seatback toadjust the back of the seat. Release the latch tolock the seatback into position.

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEADRESTRAINTS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in this section. Failureto do so can reduce the effectiveness ofthe Active Head Restraint.

● Active Head Restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

LRS0626 LRS0320 SPA1025



● Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impairActive Head Restraint function.

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-ing the force that the seatback receives from theoccupant in a rear-end collision. The movementof the head restraint helps support the occu-pant’s head by reducing its backward movementand helping absorb some of the forces that maylead to whiplash type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the Active Head Restraints asdescribed in this section.

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

To adjust the head restraint forward or backward(Type B only), push it in the direction required.

The front seats and 2nd row captain’s chairshead restraints are removable. See “Head re-straint storage” in the “Instrument and controls”section. The 3rd row bench seat head restraintsare not removable.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

Type A — FrontLRS0286

Type B — 2nd rowLRS0678



Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

ARMRESTS

To use the armrests, pull them down to the rest-ing position.

sA Resting position

sB Stowed position

Adjustable front seat armrest’s (if soequipped)

To use the adjustable seat armrest, pull it down tothe resting position. Adjust the armrest to thedesired position by raising the armrest to thedesired height and releasing the armrest. To re-adjust the armrest to a lower position, raise the

armrest to the stowed position, then pull it to theresting position and adjust to the desired height.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seats when they arein the fold-down position. In a collision,people riding in these areas withoutproper restraints are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in any areaof your vehicle that is not equipped withseats and seat belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat and using aseat belt properly.

● Do not fold down the rear seats whenoccupants are in the rear seat area orany luggage is on the rear seats.

● Head restraints should be adjustedproperly as they may provide significantprotection against injury in an accident.Always replace and adjust them prop-erly if they have been removed for anyreason.

WRS0134 WRS0531



● If the head restraints are removed forany reason, they should be securelystored to prevent them from causinginjury to passengers or damage to thevehicle in case of sudden braking or anaccident.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-vent it from sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or collision, unsecuredcargo could cause personal injury.

FoldingTo fold the seatback forward, for cargo hauling,lift up on the recline lever and fold the seatbackover the seat base.

Folding the 2nd row captain’s chair

s1 Fold the 2nd row captain’s chairs to the floorfor maximum cargo hauling, move the headrestraints forward before folding.

s2 Lift up on the recline lever to fold the seat-back forward on the seat base.

LRS0627 LRS0628



s3 Push down on the small knob on the back ofthe seat to release the base of the seat.

s4 Then fold the entire seat forward into thestowed position in the floor.

s5 Reverse this process to return the 2nd rowcaptain’s chairs to a seating position.

LRS0702 LRS0629 LRS0630



FoldingTo fold the seatback forward, for cargo hauling,lift up on the latch in the center of the seatback tofold the seatback over the seat base.

Folding the 3rd row bench seat

WARNING

● The 3rd row bench seat is heavy. Becareful when folding and unfolding.

● To avoid injury to yourself or others,keep hands and body clear of flooropening when folding.

1. Disconnect and secure the center seat beltand tongues into the retractor base. See“Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt” laterin this section.

2. To fold the 3rd row bench seat flat into thefloor, for maximum cargo hauling, pull thestrap on the seatback to allow all three headrestraints to fold forward. If the head re-straints are in the folded position, the seatmay not be latched into the floor.

LRS0675 LRS0676



3. Pull back on the pull strap to release theback of the seat. Rotate the seatback towardthe back of the vehicle.

4. Pull up on the lever located on the back ofthe seat base. This will fold the seat basetoward the back of the vehicle.

5. The entire seat will rotate toward you andstow in the floor.

LRS0677 WRS0706 WRS0707



6. The rear seat anchors are spring loaded andcan be folded into the side panels to maxi-mize cargo space. The anchors are held inthe folded position by the items in the cargoarea. When the load is removed from thecargo area, the rear seat anchors automati-cally return to the unfolded position.

7. Reverse this process to return the benchseat to a seating position. Make sure toproperly return the head restraints tothe upright position, push the benchseat down into the floor, and pull backon the seatback until they latch intoplace.

WARNING

● Do not unfasten the rear center seatbelt connector except when foldingdown the rear seat.

● When attaching the rear center seatbelt connector, be certain that the seat-backs are completely secured in thelatched position and the rear centerseat belt connector is completelysecured.

● If the rear center seat belt connectorand the seatbacks are not secured inthe correct position, serious personalinjury may result in an accident or sud-den stop.

● When returning the seatbacks, be sureto attach the rear center seat beltconnector.

WRS0708 LRS0703



PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-vated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of preten-sioner system components should bedone by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014



There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear facing child restraint

● Front facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints and are at least 1 yearold. Booster seats are used to help position avehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraintsavailable for larger children for additional protec-tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

InfantsInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small ChildrenChildren that are over one year old and weigh atleast 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward

facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for minimum and maximum weightand height recommendations. NISSAN recom-mends that small children be placed in childrestraints that comply with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards. You should choose a childrestraint that fits your vehicle and always followthe manufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should beused to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt in the child’s seating position fits close tothe face or neck or if the lap portion of the seatbelt goes across the abdomen. The booster seatshould raise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on thehips. A booster seat can only be used in seatingpositions that have a three-point type seat belt.The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and



have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the childhas grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on ornear the face and neck, use the shoulder beltwithout the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

Power front seat shownLRS0607



s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat, 2nd row captain’schairs and the rear bench seat three-point seatbelts have two modes of operation:

● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modeallows the seat belt to extend and retract to allowthe driver and passengers some freedom ofmovement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat beltwhen the vehicle slows down rapidly or duringcertain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for childrestraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat beltcannot be extended again until the seat belttongue is detached from the buckle and fullyretracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR modeafter the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only forchild restraint installation. During normalseat belt use by a passenger, the ALR modeshould not be activated. If it is activated itmay cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-sion. It can also change the operation ofthe front passenger air bag. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

WRS0137 WRS0138



WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operationSeat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139



Center of the 3rd row bench seatThe 3rd row center seat belt has a connectortongue s1 and a seat belt tongue s2 . Both theconnector tongue and the seat belt tongue mustbe securely latched for proper seat belt opera-tion.

WARNING

● Always fasten the connector tongueand the seat belt in the order shown.

● Always make sure both the connectortongue and the seat belt tongue aresecured when using the seat belt. Donot use it with only the seat belt tongueattached. This could result in seriouspersonal injury in case of an accident ora sudden stop.

SSS0240 SSS0241

LRS0432



Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt

When folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd rowcenter seat belt can be retracted into a stowedposition as follows:

s1 Hold the connector tongue so that the seatbelt does not retract suddenly when thetongue is released from the connectorbuckle. Release the connector tongue byinserting a suitable tool such as a key into theconnector buckle sA .

s2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

s3 Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabricsleeve so it will lay flat. Then secure theconnector tongue into the retractor base.

WARNING




LRS0433



Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt

Always be sure the 3rd row center seat beltconnector tongue and connector buckle are at-tached. Disconnect only when folding down therear seat.

To connect the buckle:

s1 Pull out the connector tongue from the re-tractor base.

s2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabricsleeve.

s3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiverbuckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re-ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < mark.

The center seat belt connector tongue can beattached only into the rear center seat belt con-nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seatbelt” earlier in this section.

WARNING




Shoulder belt height adjustment (Frontand 2nd row seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, push or pull outs1 the adjustmentbutton and move the shoulder belt anchors2 tothe desired position, so the belt passes over thecenter of the shoulder. The belt should be awayfrom your face and neck, but not falling off yourshoulder. Release the adjustment button to lockthe shoulder belt anchor into position.

Front seatsLRS0294



WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERSIf, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.

2nd row seatsLRS0242



PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. A rear-facing childrestraint must only be used in the rearseat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a front facing child re-straint in the front seat, see “Child re-straint installation using the seat belts”later in this section.

● Improper use or improper installationof a child restraint can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the LATCH attachment or by theseat belt path. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the belt holds the re-straint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH Systemor a seat belt to prevent it from beingthrown around in case of a sudden stopor accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint lower anchor system, referred to as theLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Systemor LATCH. Some child restraints include two rigidor webbing-mounted attachments that can beconnected to these lower anchors. For details,see the “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrenSystem (LATCH)” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See“Child restraint installation using the seat belts”later in this section. In general, child restraints arealso designed to be installed with the lap portionof a lap/shoulder seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and small children of various sizes. Whenselecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.



LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHERSFOR CHILDREN SYSTEM (LATCH)Your vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren System (LATCH) compat-ible child restraints.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to installchild restraints in the following positions only:

● 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped).

● 3rd row bench seat center position only (ifso equipped).

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of theseat cushion near the seatback. A label is at-tached to the seatback to help you locate theLATCH anchors.

WARNING

● Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown inthe illustration. If a child restraint is notsecured properly, your child could beseriously injured or killed in anaccident.

LATCH system anchor locationsWRS0315

LATCH label locations 2nd row captain’schairs (if so equipped)

LRS0631

LATCH label locations 3rd row bench (if soequipped)

WRS0691



● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

Installing child restraint LATCH anchorattachmentsLATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. This system isknown as the LATCH system. This system mayalso be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible system. With this system, you do nothave to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the childrestraint. Check your child restraint for a labelstating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys-tem. This information may also be in the instruc-tions provided by the child restraint manufac-

turer. If you have such a child restraint, refer to theillustration for the seating positions equippedwith LATCH system anchors which can be usedto secure the child restraint.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint. See “Childrestraint installation using LATCH on 2nd rowcaptain’s chairs (if so equipped)” or “Child re-

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662



straint installation using LATCH on 3rd rowbench seat (if so equipped)” in this section.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraint requiresthe use of a top tether strap, it must be secured tothe anchor point.

WARNING

● Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstances arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

● Do not allow cargo to contact the toptether strap when it is attached to thetop tether anchor. Properly secure thecargo so it does not contact the toptether strap. Cargo that is not properlysecured or cargo that contacts the toptether strap may damage it during acollision. Your child could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision if the toptether strap is damaged.

Top Tether Anchor Point LocationsAnchor points are located in the following loca-tions:

● On the floor behind the front passenger seat(2–passenger cargo van only) as shown.

● On the back of the 2nd row captain’s chairs(if so equipped) as shown.

● On the back of the 3rd row center seatingposition (if so equipped) as shown.

If you have any questions when installing atop tether strap child restraint on the rearseat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-tails.

The front passenger seat and 2nd row captain’schair anchor point locations are marked with thelabel shown.

Installing top tether strapFirst, secure the child restraint with the LATCHsystem (2nd row captain’s seating positions andcenter seating position only of the 3rd row benchseat) or the seat belt, as applicable.

LabelWRS0210



Front passenger seat (2 passenger cargovan only)

For the front passenger seat in the 2 passengercargo van only, install the top tether strap asfollows:

1. Adjust the head restraint to its highest posi-tion.

2. Route the top tether strap between the headrestraint and the top of the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint on the floor directly behind the seat.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraintinstallation instructions in this section and thechild restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped)

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

For the 2nd row captain’s chairs (if so equipped),install the top tether strap as follows:

1. Remove the head restraint. Store it in asecure location.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint on the seat directly behind the childrestraint.

LRS0322 LRS0307





3rd row bench seat (if so equipped)

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraintwith a top tether strap can only be used inthe center position. Do not place in anoutboard seating position and attempt toangle the tether strap to the centerposition.

The center position of the 3rd row bench seat isthe seating position that can use a top tetherstrap.

For the 3rd row bench seat (if so equipped),install the top tether strap as follows:

1. Position the top tether strap under the headrestraint (TYPE A) or position the top tetherstrap around the side of the head restraint(TYPE B).

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint on the seat directly behind the childrestraint.

Type AWRS0687

Type BWRS0688





CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH-2ND ROWCAPTAIN’S CHAIRS (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown. Forthe LATCH lower anchor locations, see“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren System (LATCH)” in this section. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● The LATCH anchors are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

● Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH anchors,such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-ion material. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the LATCH an-chors are obstructed.

Front-facingFollow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row captain’s chairs usingLATCH:

1. Recline the seatback if the seatback is ad-justable to assist in attaching the child re-straint to the lower anchors.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-erly attached to the lower anchors.

4. Return the seatback to its normal uprightand locked position.

The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjustor remove the head restraint to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-ment” in this section. If the head restraint is re-moved, store it in a secure place. Be sure toinstall the head restraint when the child restraint

Front facing web-mounted – step 3LRS0663



is removed. If the seating position does not havean adjustable head restraint and it is interferingwith the proper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child restraint.

5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section.

7. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-tachment and use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug it forwardto make sure that it is securely held in place.It should not move more than 1 in (25 mm). Ifit does move more than 1 in (25 mm), pullagain on the anchor attachments to furthertighten the child restraint. If you are unable toproperly secure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint. Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3LRS0664

Front facing – step 5LRS0671

Front facing – step 7WRS0697



8. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 4through 7.

Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint in the 2nd row captain’s chairs usingLATCH:





Rear facing web-mounted – step 3LRS0665

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3LRS0666



5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.



CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH-3RD ROW BENCHSEAT (if so equipped)

WARNING

● Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown. Forthe LATCH lower anchor locations, see“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren System (LATCH)” in this section. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● The LATCH anchors are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Underno circumstance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.





● Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH anchors,such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-ion material. The child restraint will notbe secured properly if the LATCH an-chors are obstructed.

Front-facingFollow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint in the 3rd row bench seats usingLATCH:





The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seatback. If the seating posi-tion does not have an adjustable head restraintand it is interfering with the proper child restraintfit, try another seating position or a different childrestraint.

Front facing web-mounted – step 3WRS0685

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 3WRS0686



5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments

6. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section. Do not install child restraintsthat require the use of the top tether strap toseating positions that do not have a toptether anchor.







Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint in the 3rd row bench seats usingLATCH:

1. Recline the seatback in vehicles with adjust-able seatbacks to assist in attaching thechild restraint to the lower anchors.


3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Checkto make sure that the LATCH attachment isproperly attached to the lower anchors.


Rear facing web-mounted – step 3WRS0689

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 3WRS0690



5. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourhand to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.







CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat. Front air bags inflate with greatforce. A rear-facing child restraint couldbe struck by the front air bag in a crashand could seriously injure or kill yourchild.

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in this sec-tion for details.

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an Automatic LockingRetractor (ALR) which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the ALR mode will resultin the child restraint not being properlysecured. The restraint could tip over orotherwise be unsecured and cause in-jury to the child in a sudden stop orcollision. Also, it can change the opera-tion of the front passenger air bag. See“Front passenger air bag and statuslight” later in this section.

● When installing a child restraint systemin the rear center position, both thecenter seat belt connector tongue andbuckle tongue must be secured. See“Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt”earlier in this section.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat except for the 2-passengercargo van.

● Front-facing child restraints can be in-stalled in all 3rd row bench seat posi-tions. However, front-facing child re-straints that require the use of a toptether strap can be installed in the cen-ter 3rd row position only. Do not installa child restraint requiring a top tetherstrap in an outboard position and at-tempt to angle the tether to the 3rd rowcenter anchor.

The instructions in this section apply to childrestraint installation using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seats or the front passenger seat.

WRS0256



Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions

The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seatback. If necessary, adjustor remove the head restraint to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-ment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to install the head restraintwhen the child restraint is removed. If the seatingposition does not have an adjustable head re-straint and it is interfering with the proper childrestraint fit, try another seating position or a dif-ferent child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1WRS0699




4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.






7. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section. Do not install child restraintsthat require the use of a top tether strap toseating positions that do not have a toptether anchor.

8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again onthe shoulder belt to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properly securethe restraint, move the restraint to anotherseating position and try again, or try a differ-ent child restraint. Not all child restraints fit inall types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR modeby trying to pull more seat belt out of theretractor. If you cannot pull any more beltwebbing out of the retractor, the retractor isin the ALR mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light should illuminate. If thislight is not illuminated see 9Front passengerair bag and status light9 in this section.Move the child restraint to anotherseating position. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-straint mode) is canceled.





Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint on the seat.Always follow the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR) modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256

Rear facing – step 2WRS0761

Rear facing – step 3LRS0669



4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the childrestraint; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraint tocompress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 in (25 mm). If it doesmove more than 1 in (25 mm), pull again onthe shoulder belt to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properly securethe restraint, move the restraint to anotherrear seating position and try again, or try adifferent child restraint. Not all child re-straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear facing – step 4LRS0670





7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR modeby trying to pull more seat belt out of theretractor. If you cannot pull any more seatbelt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac-tor is in the ALR mode.

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraintmode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● NISSAN recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a booster seat in thefront seat, see “Booster seat installa-tion” in this section.

● A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

● Improper use or improper installationof a booster seat can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

ARS1098

BOOSTER SEATS



● Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protection dur-ing a collision.

● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

● If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

● After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

● Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation”later in this section.

● When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the boosterseat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

LRS0455



● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if alow back booster seat s1 is chosen, thevehicle seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seat back islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat s2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with yourchild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

NISSAN recommends that booster seatsbe installed in the rear seat. However, ifyou must install a booster seat in the frontpassenger seat, move the passenger’sseat to the rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-matic Locking Retractor mode when usinga booster seat with the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in therear seat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0512



1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

WRS0699Rear center position

LRS0513

Rear outboard positionLRS0512



4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in the “Three-point seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the frontpassenger seat, turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. The front passenger air bagstatus light may or may not illuminate,depending on the size of the child and thetype of booster seat being used. See “Frontpassenger air bag and status light” later inthis section.

Front passenger positionLRS0454 WRS0475



PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe following systems:

● Driver and passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air BagSystem)

● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag

● Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the chest area of thedriver and front passenger in certain side impactcollisions. The side air bags are designed toinflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-mental air bag system: This system can helpcushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in front and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the seat belts and are not a substitutefor them. Seat belts should always be correctlyworn and the occupant seated a suitable dis-tance away from the steering wheel, instrumentpanel and door finishers. See “Seat belts” earlierin this section for instructions and precautions onseat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



WARNING

● The front air bags ordinarily will notinflate in the event of a side impact, rearimpact, rollover, or lower severity fron-tal collision. Always wear your seatbelts to help reduce the risk or severityof injury in various kinds of accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

● The seat belts and the front air bags aremost effective when you are sitting wellback and upright in the seat. The frontair bags inflate with great force. Evenwith the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, if you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from thefront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. TheAdvanced Air Bag System monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when the frontair bag inflates.

WRS0031



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the front air bags, side airbags or curtain air bags inflate if theyare not properly restrained. Pre-teensand children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating front air bag could seriously in-jure or kill your child. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section fordetails.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bags and roof-mounted curtainside-impact supplemental air bags:

● The side air bags and curtain air bagsordinarily will not inflate in the event ofa frontal impact, rear impact, rollover orlower severity side collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256Do not lean against the door.

WRS0431



WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags andcurtain air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat with both feet on the floor. Theside air bag and curtain air bag inflatewith great force. Do not allow anyone toplace their hand, leg or face near theside air bag on the side of the seatbackof the front seat or near the side roofrails. Do not allow anyone sitting in thefront seats or rear outboard seats toextend their hand out of the window orlean against the door. Some examplesof dangerous riding positions areshown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, donot hold onto the seatback of the frontseat. If the side air bag inflates, you maybe seriously injured. Be especially care-ful with children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere with sideair bag inflation.

SSS0162 WRS0306



1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag (driver’s side)

3. Seat belt buckle switches

4. Supplemental front-impact air bagmodules

5. Crash zone sensor6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)7. Occupant classification system control

unit

SSS0159

LRS0679



8. Occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor)

9. Seat belt with pretensioner10. Satellite sensors11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules12. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag (passenger’s side)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag islocated in the center of the steering wheel. Thepassenger supplemental front-impact air bag ismounted in the dashboard above the glove box.The front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper front air bag system opera-tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit(ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas-sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation isbased on the severity of a collision and seat beltusage for the driver. For the front passenger, itadditionally monitors the weight of an occupantor object on the seat and seat belt tension. Basedon information from the sensors, only one front airbag may inflate in a crash, depending on thecrash severity and whether the front occupantsare belted or unbelted. Additionally, the frontpassenger air bag may be automatically turnedOFF under some conditions, depending on theweight detected on the passenger seat and howthe seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bagis OFF, the passenger air bag status light will beilluminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light willnot be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN

dealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contactNISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noisemay be heard, followed by the release of smoke.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the face andchest of the front occupants. They can help savelives and reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facial abrasionsor other injuries. Front air bags do not providerestraint to the lower body.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem, seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. The front air bags inflate quickly inorder to help protect the front occupants. Be-cause of this, the force of the front air bag inflatingcan increase the risk of injury if the occupant istoo close to, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.



The front air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tion.


Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated near the climate controls in the center ofthe instrument panel. The light operates as fol-lows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light is OFF to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is opera-tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

WRS0475



The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bagto certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode (child restraint mode). Based on theweight on the seat detected by the occupantclassification sensor and the belt tension de-tected on the seat belt, the Advanced Air BagSystem determines whether the front passenger

air bag should be automatically turned OFF asrequired by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode,this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF.Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seatbelt properly for the most effective protection bythe seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip ormove in an accident or sudden stop. This canalso result in the passenger air bag inflating in a

crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-straints” earlier in this section for proper use andinstallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If the airbag status light is not illuminated (indicating that



the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could bethat the child restraint or seat belt is not beingused properly. Make sure that the child restraint isinstalled properly, the seat belt is used properlyand the occupant is positioned properly. If the airbag status light is not illuminated, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-minate even though you believe that the childrestraint, the seat belts and the occupant areproperly positioned, the system may be sensingan unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag isOFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool. However,until you have confirmed with your dealer thatyour air bag is working properly, reposition theoccupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges area

in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bagprecautions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the front air baginflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe front air bag system.

● Tampering with the front air bag systemmay result in serious personal injury.Tampering includes changes to thesteering wheel and the instrumentpanel assembly by placing materialover the steering wheel pad and abovethe instrument panel or by installingadditional trim material around the airbag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).



● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thefront air bag system. Tampering withthe seat belt system may result in seri-ous personal injury.

● Work on and around the front air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS) wiring should not bemodified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the front air bag systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of theseatback of the front seats. The curtain air bagsare located in the side roof rails. These systemsare designed to meet voluntary guidelines to helpreduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-pants. However, all of the information, cau-tions and warnings in this manual still ap-ply and must be followed. The side air bagsand curtain air bags are designed to inflate inhigher severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity side impact.They are designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-tain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper side air bag and curtain airbag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bagsinflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followedby release of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care should be takennot to inhale it, as it may cause irritation andchoking. Those with a history of a breathing con-dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,help to cushion the impact force on the chest ofthe front occupants. Curtain air bags help tocushion the impact force to the head of occu-pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-sitions. They can help save lives and reduceserious injuries. However, an inflating side air bagand curtain air bag may cause abrasions or otherinjuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do notprovide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the side air bag. Rear seatpassengers should be seated as far away as

WRS0532



practical from the door finishers and side roofrails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflatequickly in order to help protect the front and rearoutboard occupants. Because of this, the force ofthe side air bag and curtain air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, these air bag modulesduring inflation. The side air bag and curtain airbag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-erate only when the ignition switch is in theON or START position.


WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain air bag system componentswill be hot. Do not touch them; you mayseverely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain air bagsystems. This is to prevent damage to oraccidental inflation of the side air bagand curtain air bag systems.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of theside air bag and curtain air bag systems.

● Tampering with the side air bags mayresult in serious personal injury. Forexample, do not change the front seatsby placing material near the seatbacksor by installing additional trim material,such as seat covers, around the side airbag.

● Work around and on the side air bagand curtain air bag systems should bedone by a NISSAN dealer. Installationof electrical equipment should also bedone by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-ing harnesses* should not be modifiedor disconnected. Unauthorized electri-cal test equipment and probing devicesshould not be used on the side air bagsystem.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the side air bag andcurtain air bag systems and guide the buyer tothe appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-ter activation. They must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.



● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but a pretensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pretensioner system. This is to pre-vent damage to or accidental activationof the pretensioners. Tampering withthe pretensioner system may result inserious personal injury.

● Work around and on the pretensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pretensioner system.

● If you need to dispose of a pretensioneror scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSANdealer. Correct pretensioner disposalprocedures are set forth in the appropri-ate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrectdisposal procedures could cause per-sonal injury.

The pretensioner system activates in conjunctionwith the front air bag system. The pretensionersystem also activates with curtain and rollover airbags in certain types of rollover collisions or nearrollovers. Working with the seat belt retractor, ithelps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of collisions,helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat beltretractor. These seat belts are used the same wayas conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-leased and a loud noise may be heard. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allowthe seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) toreduce forces against the chest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-tem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pretensioner

system may not function properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pretensioner systemand guide the buyer to the appropriate sectionsin this Owner’s Manual.



1. SRS Front Air Bag Warning Labels2. SRS Front Seat-Mounted Side-Impact

Supplemental Air Bag Warning LabelSUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impactsupplemental air bag, and roof-mounted curtainside-impact supplemental air bag systems areplaced in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impactair bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impactsupplemental air bag and seat belt pretensionersystems. The monitored circuits include the Airbag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-ellite sensors, side air bag modules, curtain airbag modules, pretensioners and all related wir-ing.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-sioner systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bags, sideair bags, curtain air bags or pretensioners maynot operate properly. They must be checked andrepaired. Take your vehicle to the nearestNISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bag,side air bags, curtain air bag and/or pre-tensioner systems will not operate in anaccident. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle checked by aNISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

LRS0318 LRS0100



Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bagsand pretensioners are designed to inflate on aone-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it isdamaged, the supplemental air bag warning lightremains illuminated after inflation has occurred.Repair and replacement of these supplementalair bag systems should be done only by aNISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain airbags, pretensioners and related parts should bepointed out to the person performing the mainte-nance. The ignition switch should always be inthe LOCK position when working under the hoodor inside the vehicle.

WARNING

● Once a front air bag, side air bag, orcurtain air bag has inflated, the air bagmodule will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe front air bags inflate, the activatedpretensioners must also be replaced.The air bag module and pretensionersshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pretensionerscannot be repaired.

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtainair bag systems, and the pretensionersystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap thevehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Cor-rect supplemental air bag and preten-sioner disposal procedures are set forthin the appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.



2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . 2-7Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-20Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Traction Control System (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-25Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Instrument panel storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Console box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Center tray table (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32


Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Cargo organizer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-343rd row armrest bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Garment hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36Power vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Manual vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

SkyView™ glass-paneled roof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 2-39Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Lights on demand switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44HomeLinkT universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-44

Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-47If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47


1. Ventilators (P. 4-30)2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-18)3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/BluetoothT hands-free phonesystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-62)

4. Driver supplemental air bag/horn(P. 1-52, P. 2-24)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-13)7. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch(P. 2-16, 2-17)

8. Display screen/Navigation system*(P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P. 1-52)

10. Glove box (P. 2-30)11. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-60)12. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-23)13. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-40)14. Audio system controls (P. 4-43)15. Display screen/Navigation system*

controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-7, P. 4-17)16. Power outlets (P. 2-26)LIC0928

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-8)18. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)19. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-21)20. Rear sonar system off switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-25)21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (if so equipped) or TractionControl System (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-25, P. 2-25)

22. Lights on demand switch (P. 2-41)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

1. Tachometer2. Warning/indicator lights3. Speedometer4. Engine coolant temperature gauge5. Fuel gauge6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer

LIC0929

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


1. Speedometer2. Odometer3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance ofindividual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Trip

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-ond resets the trip odometer to zero.

Elapsed time, driving distance and averagespeed information is also available. Refer to“Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems”section later in this manual.

LIC0930 LIC0953



TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-gine speed. Operating the engine in thered zone may cause serious enginedamage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

LIC0931 LIC0932



FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when theamount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL)” later inthis section.

LIC0933



or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime Front passenger air bag status light

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Automatic transmission position indicator light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Traction control system off indicator light (if soequipped)

Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light High beam indicator light (Blue) Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if soequipped)

Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Low windshield washer fluid warning light Overdrive off indicator light

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then gooff:

or , , , , , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



WARNING LIGHTSor Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning lightilluminates and then turns off. This indicates theABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while theengine is running, or while driving, it may indicatethe ABS is not functioning properly. Have thesystem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-tion is turned off. The brake system then operatesnormally, but without anti-lock assistance. See9Brake system9 in the 9Starting and driving9 sec-tion.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight warns of a low brake fluid level. If the lightcomes on while the engine is running with theparking brake not applied, stop the vehicle andperform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.



Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. The low fuel warning chimewill also sound under certain conditions. See“Low fuel warning chime” later in this section.

Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferablybefore the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). Therewill be a small reserve of fuel in the tankwhen the fuel gauge needle reaches E(Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ONposition, this light illuminates for about 1 secondand turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you selectthe tire pressure information in the display (if soequipped), the LOW PRESSURE warning mes-sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for eachtire will also be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressure isadjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recom-mended pressure, the vehicle must be driven atspeeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate theTPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warninglight. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tirepressure.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isplaced in the ON position. The light will remain onafter the 1 minute. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch in the ON position, havethe vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealeras soon as possible.



● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Driving with under-inflated tires maypermanently damage the tires and in-crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could re-sult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.If the light still comes on while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash for approximately 1 minute.The light will remain on after 1 minute.Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat belt

is fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the system does not activate the warn-ing light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the frontair bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-sioner systems need servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.



● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint systems (air bag system) and/or thepretensioners may not function properly. For ad-ditional details see “Supplemental restraint sys-tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the front air bags,side air bags, curtain air bags and/or pre-tensioners will not operate in an accident.To help avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, the indicator in the tachometer shows theautomatic transmission selector lever position.See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicate apotential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also comeon steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to makesure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closedtightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-



ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — Anemission control system malfunction hasbeen detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. Ifthe fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tightenor install the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn off aftera few driving trips. If the light does notturn off after a few driving trips, have thevehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. Youdo not need to have your vehicle towed tothe dealer.

● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — Anengine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.

Overdrive off indicator light

This light comes on when the overdrive functionis OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive function iscontrolled by the overdrive switch.

See “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is inthe LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This functionindicates the security system equipped on thevehicle is operational.

For additional information, see “Security sys-tems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the system isoperational. If the light does not come on or doesnot go off, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Traction Control System offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the tractioncontrol off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-cates the Traction Control System is not operat-ing.



Push the traction control off switch again or re-start the engine and the system will operate nor-mally. See “Traction Control System (TCS)” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the TractionControl System (TCS) is operational. If the lightstays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-tor light while you are driving, have the TractionControl System checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Traction Control System is operating,you might feel slight vibration or hear the systemworking when starting the vehicle or accelerat-ing, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the VehicleDynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys-tem is not operating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switchagain or restart the engine and the system willoperate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes onwhen you turn the ignition key to the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if thesystem is operational. If the light stays on orcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the Vehicle DynamicControl system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system isoperating, you might feel slight vibration or hearthe system working when starting the vehicle oraccelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERSBrake pad wear warningThe disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chimeA chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chimeWith the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.



Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorswhen the system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that activates whena vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doorscan be locked with the key, power door lockswitch or with the keyfob.

Keyfob operation:

● Push the button on the keyfob.All doors lock. The hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once to indicateall doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flash

twice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicleswith monochrome screen, refer to “Silenc-ing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section later in thismanual. For vehicles with color screen, referto “Vehicle electronic systems” in the “Dis-play screen, heater, air conditioner, audioand phone systems” section later in thismanual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comeson. The light stays on for about 30seconds. The vehicle security system is nowpre-armed. After about 30 seconds the ve-hicle security system automatically shiftsinto the armed phase. The light beginsto flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the30-second pre-arm time period, the driver’sdoor is unlocked by the key or the keyfob, orthe ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, thesystem will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails to

WIC0834

SECURITY SYSTEMS



glow for 30 seconds, unlock the driv-er’s door once and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors closed and lockedwith the ignition key in the OFF posi-tion.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockingthe driver’s door with the key, or by pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening a door without using the key orkeyfob (even if the door is unlocked by usingthe inside lock knob or the power door lockswitch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor with the key, or by pressing the but-ton on the keyfob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.



Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACCposition. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allregistered keys that you have when visitingyour NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knob towardsA (Slower) or sB (Faster). Also, the inter-mittent operation speed varies in accor-dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-tent operation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion for vehicles with color display screen.Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-dio and phone systems”section later in thismanual.

s2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

s3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

LIC0474 WIC0843

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF positionto operate the wiper.

s1 Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation(not adjustable)

s2 ON – continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward s3 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the window and ob-scure your vision. Warm the rear windowwith the defroster before you wash therear window.

CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.



WIC0844

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHER SWITCH



To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light comes on.Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

Type AWIC0934

Type BWIC0935

Type ALIC0560

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds afteryou turn the key to OFF and all doors areclosed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff is adjust-able for vehicles with color display screen.See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-dio and phone systems”section later in thismanual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion s1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain on for 5 minutes. During that 5 minutes:

● if all doors are closed, the headlights remainon for 45 seconds, then turn off.

● if another door is opened, then the 5 minutetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch tothe OFF, , or position.

Type BLIC0687 LIC0561



Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor s1 located on top ofthe instrument panel. The autolight sensorcontrols the autolight; if it is covered, theautolight sensor reacts as if it is dark outand the headlights will illuminate. If thisoccurs while parked with the engine offand the key in the ON position, your vehi-cle’s battery could become discharged.

Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while theheadlight switch is in the or posi-tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

After the headlights automatically turn off with theheadlight switch in the or position,the headlights will illuminate again for 5 minutes ifthe headlight switch is moved to the OFF positionand then turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-duced intensity when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytime runninglights operate with the headlight switch in theOFF position or in the position. Turn theheadlight switch to the position for fullillumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

LIC0954 LIC0390



WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROL

The instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is inthe , or AUTO position (with auto-lights activated).

Turn the control s1 to adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel lights when driving at night. Thebrightness indicator s2 will illuminate in theodometer when the control is turned. The indica-tor will turn off a few seconds after the control isreleased.

The instrument brightness control will not adjustthe brightness when the headlights or parkinglights are off.

LIC0936



TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch tothe position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

LIC0563 LIC0393



CORNERING LIGHTThe cornering light provides additional illumina-tion toward the turning direction. The corneringlight will illuminate on the turning direction sidewhen a turn is signaled with the headlights on.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

AIC0102 LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH



To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (ifso equipped). The switches are located at thesides of the seats.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the (low) or (high) posi-tion of the switch, as desired, depending onthe temperature. The indicator light in theswitch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leavethe vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using the seat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

LIC0395 WIC0905

HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)



The vehicle should be driven with the TractionControl System (TCS) on for most driving condi-tions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCSreduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.The engine speed will be reduced even if theaccelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximumengine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.The indicator will come on.

Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the en-gine to turn ON the system. See “Traction ControlSystem (TCS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engineto turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safe todo so before backing up. Always back upslowly.

The rear sonar system (if so equipped) is activewhen the ignition is in the ON position and theshift selector lever is in R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

LIC0451 WIC0534 LIC0471

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(if so equipped)



The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.

The system will automatically reset the next timethe ignition switch is turned on.

See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones.

The power outlets located in the 1st and 2ndrows are powered only when the ignition key is inthe ACC or ON position.

The power outlet located in the cargo area ispowered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● This power outlet is not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter unit.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

1st rowLIC0937

2nd rowWIC0938

POWER OUTLET



● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

SUNGLASSES HOLDERPull the lid down to open the sunglasses holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglassesholder while parking in direct sunlight.The heat may damage the sunglasses.

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE

Cargo areaWIC0939 LIC0945

Below CD insert slot(if so equipped)

LIC0940

STORAGE



CONSOLE BOX (if so equipped)Push the corresponding button s1 to open thesmall storage compartments.

Press the front portion of the lid s2 down from thehandle area until it stops.

While keeping the downward force applied, pushthe lid rearward s3 to the desired openingamount. The CD/DVD tray is removable.

Pull up on the lever to access the front storagebin on the console box.

Below power outletsLIC0941 WIC1037 LIC0943



CENTER TRAY TABLE (if soequipped)To use the center tray table, raise it up until itlocks into the upright position.

To access the small storage compartment on thetop of the tray table, raise the lid.

CAUTION

To avoid damaging it, do not apply a totalload of more than 50 lbs (23 kg) to thecenter tray table.

To store the tray table, pull the lever locatedbeneath the tray table up sA and gently lower thetray table to its original position.

LIC0894 LIC0895



GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themaster key when locking s1 or unlocking s2 theglove box. The valet key cannot be used to lock orunlock the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

MAP POCKETS

LIC0944Front door

WIC0946

Sliding doorLIC0520



SEATBACK POCKETSThe seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

GROCERY HOOKSThe grocery hooks allow for standard size plasticgrocery bags to hang side by side.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 18lbs (8 kg) to a single grocery hook.

CARGO NET (if so equipped)The net located on the back of the driver’s seatcan be used to hold small objects.

WARNING

● Do not place sharp objects in the net.Such objects may become dangerousprojectiles and cause injury when thevehicle is moving or if the vehicle isinvolved in a collision.

● The cargo restrained in the net must notexceed 18 lb (8 kg) or the net may notstay secured.

LIC0503 LIC0504 WIC0878



OVERHEAD CONSOLE

WARNING

Keep storage bins closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

Large storage binPush the button to open the storage bin.

Push the lid up to close.

Small storage binPush the button to open the small storage bin.

Push the lid up to close.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hardobjects can injure you in an accident.

Front

WIC0959 LIC0512Type A

LIC0955



To use the cup holders, raise the center tray table.Refer to “Center tray table” earlier in this section.

2nd row 3rd rowType BLIC0896 LIC0509 WIC0947



Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

● Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

● Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

CARGO ORGANIZER (if soequipped)

To access the cargo organizer:

1. Move both front seats as forward as pos-sible. Refer to 9Seats9 in the 9Safety – seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem9 section earlier in this manual.

2. Stow the center tray table (if so equipped).Refer to “Center tray table” earlier in thissection.

3. Lift up the floor carpeting and the removablefloor board sA .

Sliding door bottle holderLIC0521

WIC0893



3RD ROW ARMREST BINRaise the lid to open the 3rd row armrest bin.

CARGO AREA STORAGE BINTo open the cargo area storage bin, turn the knobcounterclockwise s1 . The lid can be removed.

To close, replace the lid and turn the knob clock-wise s2 .

GARMENT HOOKTo store garments, pull the garment hook down tothe use position.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 55lbs (25 kg) to the hook.

WIC0948 LIC0514 WIC0831



ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roofrack. Do not load more than 125 lb (56 kg). Becareful that your vehicle does not exceed theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or itsGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front andrear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on theF.M.V.S.S. label (located on the driver’s doorpillar). For more information regarding GVWRand GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading information”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion later in this manual.

WARNING

● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle isloaded at or near the cargo carryingcapacity, especially if the significantportion of that load is carried on theroof rack.

● Heavy loading of the roof rack has thepotential to affect the vehicle stabilityand handling during sudden or abnor-mal handling maneuvers.

● Roof rack load should be evenlydistributed.

● Do not exceed maximum roof rack loadweight capacity.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing itemsfrom the roof rack. If you cannot comfort-ably lift the items onto the roof rack fromthe ground, use a ladder or stool.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

WIC0949

WINDOWS



1. Window lock button2. Power door lock switch3. Front passenger’s side automatic

switch4. Right rear power vent window switch

(if so equipped)5. Left rear power vent window switch

(if so equipped)6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition switch is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled. To opena window, push the switch and hold it down. Toclose a window, pull the switch and hold it up. Tostop the opening or closing function at any time,simply release the switch.

Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down s1 .To close the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

WIC0950 WIC0951



Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held. To stop thewindow, press the switch down while the windowis closing.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

POWER VENT WINDOWS (if soequipped)Use the vent window switches on the driver’sside window controls to open and close thepower vent windows.

To open a power vent window, press the switchdown s1 .

To close the window, lift the switch up s2 .

LIC0410 LIC0523



The power vent windows operate when the igni-tion key is in the ON position, or for 45 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the OFF position.If the driver’s or passenger’s door is openedduring this 45 second period, power to the ventwindows is cancelled.

MANUAL VENT WINDOWS (if soequipped)To open a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you until it releases.

To lock the window in the open position, push thelatch handle rearward until it locks.

To close a manual vent window, pull the latchhandle toward you and push the rear portion ofthe latch toward the rear of the vehicle until itlocks.

To close the SkyView roof sunshade, pull the tabto draw out the shade. Lock the shade in place bypositioning the rod on the holder.

To open the shade, lift the rod from the holder andease the shade back into its stored position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the SkyView roof sunshadestraight down. This can damage theshade.

LIC0524 LIC0525

SKYVIEW™ GLASS-PANELED ROOF(if so equipped)



AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. The automaticmoonroof is operational for about 45 seconds,even if the ignition switch is turned to the ACC orOFF position. If the driver’s door or the frontpassenger’s door is opened during this period ofabout 45 seconds, power to the moonroof iscanceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to-ward the open position s3 .

To fully close the moonroof, push the switchtoward the close position s4 .

To open or close the moonroof part way, push theswitch in any direction s5 while the roof is slidingopen or closed to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to-ward the up position s1 . When the moonroof isopen, it will automatically close and then tilt up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switchtoward the down position s2 .

Resetting the moonroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable afterthe battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected. Use the following reset procedure toreturn moonroof operation to normal.

1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tiltingswitch repeatedly toward the down positions2 to fully close the lid.

2. Push and hold the tilting switch for morethan 2 seconds toward the down positions2 to reestablish the lid’s home position.

The moonroof should now operate normally.

Auto reverse function (when closing ortilting down the moonroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated whenthe moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-matic operation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the moonroofoccurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroofwill immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in themoonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-mediately tilt up.

WIC0812

MOONROOF (if so equipped)



If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the moonroof will fully closegradually. Make sure nothing is caught in themoonroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open moonroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe moonroof opening while the vehicleis in motion or while the moonroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the moonroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on themoonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair themoonroof.

The lights on demand switch allows the driver toselect one of three lighting modes for the interiorlights. The lights on demand switch operatesregardless of ignition switch position.

: The interior lights illuminate. The lights willturn off automatically after 30 minutes to preventthe battery from becoming discharged.

OFF: The interior lights do not illuminate.

: The interior lights illuminate when a dooris opened.

If the lights on demand switch is in theposition, the lights will stay on for about 30 sec-onds when:

LIC0472

LIGHTS ON DEMAND SWITCH



● The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a keyor the power door lock switch while all doorsare closed and the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

● The driver’s door is opened and then closedwhile the key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

● The key is removed from the ignition switchwhile all doors are closed.

The interior lights will turn off while the 30 secondtimer is activated when:

● The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, akey, or the power door lock switch.

● The ignition switch is turned ON.

The lights will turn off automatically after 30 min-utes while doors are open to prevent the batteryfrom becoming discharged.

NOTE:

The footwell and door step lights illuminatewhen the driver and passenger doors areopen regardless of the lights on demandswitch position. These lights will turn offautomatically after 30 minutes while doorsare open to prevent the battery from be-coming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

The rear seating positions have personal lightslocated on the headliner or on the overhead con-sole. There is also a light above the cargo area onthe overhead trim.

To operate a personal light located on the head-liner (Type A), push the light.

Type ALIC0492

PERSONAL LIGHTS



The personal lights on the overhead console(Type B) can be swiveled 360 degrees. To turn onthe light, press the button. Press the button againto turn off the light.

The cargo light on the overhead trim (Type C) hasa three-position switch. To operate, push thelight.

On: The light is illuminated

Normal: The light illuminates when any door isopened or unlocked by the keyfob. The light turnsoff after 30 seconds or when all doors are closed.

Off: The light does not illluminate, regardless ofdoor position or lock status.

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

Type BLIC0493

Type CLIC0492 WIC0952

MAP LIGHTS



CONSOLE LIGHTThe console light s1 will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted (ifso equipped) with the illumination brightnesscontrol.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information refer to “Program-ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver.

LIC0956

HOMELINKT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)



PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light s1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLinkT button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLinkT flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLinkT button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLinkT to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

WIC0986 WIC0987



NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener program button,quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLinkT button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLinkT buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLinkT buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer tothe HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLinkT, continue to press and hold theHomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.



CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONIndividual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINKT BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.

The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLinkT buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part 15and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-tion is subject to the following two condi-tions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference and (2) This device must acceptany interference that may be received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690




MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Operating the manual sliding door(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Using the main ON/OFF switch for thepower sliding door (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Operating the power sliding door(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

Operating the manual lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Using the main ON/OFF switch for thepower lift gate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Operating the power lift gate(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27


1. Two master keys (black) with transpon-der chip and chrome NISSAN brandsymbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip3. Key number plate4. Transponder chipA key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masteror valet keys which are registered to the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System components in yourvehicle. These keys have a transponder chip inthe key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the glove boxlock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as five NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WPD0128

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


● Always be sure that hands and feet areclear of the door frame to avoid injurywhile closing a sliding door.

CAUTION

● Always use the door handle to open orclose a sliding door. Do not attempt toopen or close the doors by merely plac-ing your hand on the door edge or doorslide roller, as this may cause injury.

● When opening a sliding door on a slope,ensure that it is fully open and that itdoes not close by itself.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors s4 .

Driver’s sideLPD0181

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


Opening and closing windowsThe driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey to the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

Inside lock for front doorsLPD0208

Inside lock for sliding doorsLPD0224



LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), tothe lock position s1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position s2 .

Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition and any dooropen, all doors will lock and then unlock auto-matically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

OPERATING THE MANUAL SLIDINGDOOR (if so equipped)The manual sliding door can be opened from theinside or the outside.

To open a sliding door from the inside, push thebutton s1 and pull the handle toward the rear ofthe vehicle.

To open a sliding door from the outside, pull outthe outside handle.

The driver side sliding door cannot be openedfully when the fuel-filler door is open.

Door lock switchWPD0381 LPD0233



USING THE MAIN ON/OFF SWITCHFOR THE POWER SLIDING DOOR(if so equipped)

The main ON/OFF switch is located in the over-head console.

Push the switch ON to enable the door pillarswitches and the power assist feature. An indica-tor light will illuminate when the switch is in theON position.

Push the switch OFF to disable the door pillarswitches and the power assist feature. An indica-tor light will illuminate when the switch is in theOFF position.

When the switch is in the OFF position, thesliding door can still be opened with the keyfob oroverhead console switch. The sliding door canalso be opened manually with the inside or out-side handle.

NOTE:

If the child safety lock is in the lock posi-tion, the door pillar switch will not operatethe sliding door regardless of the mainON/OFF switch position.

OPERATING THE POWER SLIDINGDOOR (if so equipped)

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse a power slidingdoor, the ignition switch must be OFF, or, ifthe ignition switch is ON, the shift selectorlever must be in P (Park). Also, the powersliding doors will not operate if batteryvoltage is low.

WPD0334Door pillar switch

LPD0225



Power Assist:If the main on/off switch is ON and a sliding dooris unlocked and manually moved toward the openor close position using the inside or outsidehandle, the power assist feature will be activatedand the door will complete its motion automati-cally.

Power Open:The door automatically moves from the fullyclosed position to the fully open position in ap-proximately 3 – 6 seconds. The power openfeature can be activated by the switches on thekeyfob, the overhead console and the door pillar.

● A sliding door can be opened by the over-head console switch and the keyfob even ifthe vehicle is locked. The door will individu-ally unlock and open. When the sliding dooris closed, it will remain unlocked. The vehiclemust be re-locked to lock the door.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the door opens.

● The switch on the door pillar can only beused to open the door if the main ON/OFFswitch is ON, the door is unlocked and thechild lockout switch is not set.

A warning chime will sound if the shift selectorlever is moved out of P (Park) during a poweropen operation.

The driver’s side power sliding door cannot bepower opened when the fuel lid door is open. Awarning chime will sound if an open operation isattempted. The door can be opened manuallypart way.

Power Close:The door automatically moves from the fully openposition to the secondary position. When thesliding door reaches the secondary position, thecinching motor engages and pulls the door to itsprimary latch position. Power close takes ap-proximately 4 – 7 seconds. The power close

feature can be activated by the switches on thekeyfob, the overhead console and the door pillar.

● If the inside or outside handle is activatedwhile the cinching motor is engaged, thecinching motor will disengage and releasethe latch.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the door closes.

● The switch on the door pillar can only beused to close the door if the main ON/OFFswitch is ON.

Reverse:The door will reverse direction immediately dur-ing power open or power close if the keyfob,overhead console or door pillar switch ispressed. A chime will sound to announce thereversal.

Auto Reverse:If an obstacle is detected during power open orpower close, a warning chime will sound and thedoor will reverse direction and return to the fullopen or full close position. If a second obstacle isdetected, the door motion will stop and the clutchmode will be engaged.

Overhead console switchWPD0335



WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the door.

Clutch Mode:To help prevent unexpected slams due to gravity,the clutch mode is engaged intermittently forapproximately 5 – 8 seconds when power openor close is interrupted due to multiple obstacles,low battery voltage or the main ON/OFF switchturned to OFF. The door must then be opened orclosed manually.

Restarting the power sliding door

Some power sliding door functions will becomedisabled after the battery terminal is discon-nected and/or the electrical supply is interrupted.

The following procedure must be used to restarteach power sliding door so that all functions areenabled.

1. Turn the main on/off switch to OFF.

2. Manually open the power sliding door to itsfully open position.

3. Turn the main on/off switch to ON.

4. Press and hold the power sliding doorswitch on the overhead console until thedoor closes.

5. Release the switch.

6. Press and hold the power sliding doorswitch on the overhead console until thedoor opens as far as it can.


8. Press and hold the power sliding doorswitch on the overhead console until thedoor closes.


The power sliding door should now work prop-erly.

NOTE:

The restarting procedure must be com-pleted for both the left-hand and right-hand power sliding doors (if so equipped).



CHILD SAFETY SLIDING DOORLOCK

The child safety lock helps prevent the slidingdoor from being opened accidentally, especiallywhen small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the sliding doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside,by the overhead console switch or usingthe keyfob.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on theinterior lights and puddle lamps (if so equipped),and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfobfrom outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep,can be adjusted. For vehicles with monochromescreen, refer to “Silencing the horn beep feature”later in this section. For vehicles with colorscreen, refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audioand phone systems” section later in this manual.

Be sure to remove the key from the vehiclebefore locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a distance of approxi-mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effectivedistance depends upon the conditions aroundthe vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with onevehicle. For information concerning the purchaseand use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSANdealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

● the battery is discharged

● the distance between the vehicle and thekeyfob is over 33 ft (10 m)

The panic alarm will not activate when thekey is in the ignition switch.

WPD0437

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM



CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-rences which will damage the keyfob:

● Do not allow the keyfob to become wet.

● Do not drop the keyfob.

● Do not strike the keyfob sharply againstanother object.

● Do not place the keyfob for an extendedperiod in an area where temperaturesexceed 140°F (60°C).

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-ommends erasing the ID code of that key-fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un-authorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing proce-dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Push the button on the keyfob. Allthe doors lock. The hazard warning lightsflash twice and the horn beeps once toindicate all doors are locked.

● When the button is pushed with alldoors locked, the hazard warning lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

● If a door is open and you push thebutton, the doors will lock but the horn willnot beep and the hazard warning lights willnot flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles withmonochrome screen, refer to “Silencing the hornbeep feature” later in this section. For vehicleswith color screen, refer to “Vehicle electronicsystems” in the “Display screen, heater, air con-ditioner, audio and phone systems” section laterin this manual.

NOTE:

If you use the keyfob to change the hornbeep and lamp flash feature for vehicleswith color screen, the display will not showthe current mode and cannot be used tochange the mode. Use the keyfob to returnto the previous mode and re-enable thedisplay screen control. Refer to “Vehicleelectronic systems” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner, audio and phonesystems” section for additional informa-tion.

LPD0209



Unlocking doors

Push the button on the keyfob once.

● Only the driver’s door unlocks.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed with the ignition key inany position except the ON position.

● The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) turn on and the light timer acti-vates for 30 seconds when the lights ondemand switch is in the position withthe ignition key in any position except theON position.

Push the button on the keyfob again within5 seconds.

● All doors unlock.

● The hazard indicator flashes once if all doorsare completely closed.

The interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped) can be turned off without waiting 30seconds by inserting the key into the ignition andturning to the ON or START position, locking thedoors with the keyfob or pushing the interior lightswitch to the OFF position.

Auto relockWhen the button on the keyfob is pushed,all doors will lock automatically within 1 minuteunless one of the following operations is per-formed:

● Any door is opened.

● A key is inserted into the ignition switch andthe key is turned from OFF to ON.

Opening windowsThe keyfob allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simulta-neously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drivepositioner memoryIf the vehicle is equipped with automatic drivepositioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memorysetting.

See “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-tion.

LPD0210



Operating the power sliding door (if soequipped)Push and hold the button on the keyfob for about0.5 second to open or close the power slidingdoor.

The door will reverse direction immediately dur-ing power open or power close if the keyfobbutton is pressed. A chime will sound to an-nounce the reversal.

For more information, see “Operating the powersliding door” earlier in this section.

Operating the power lift gate (if soequipped)Push and hold the button on the keyfob for about0.5 second to open or close the lift gate. Thehazard warning lights flash and a chime soundsto indicate the power open or power close se-quence has started.

The lift gate will reverse direction immediatelyduring power open or power close if the keyfobbutton is pressed. A chime will sound to an-nounce the reversal.

For more information, see “Lift gate” later in thissection.

Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on thekeyfob for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the keyfob.

WPD0336 WPD0337 LPD0211



Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you use the keyfob to change the hornbeep and lamp flash feature for vehicleswith color screen, the display will not showthe current mode and cannot be used tochange the mode. Use the keyfob to returnto the previous mode and re-enable thedisplay screen control. Refer to “Vehicleelectronic systems” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner, audio and phonesystems” section for additional informa-tion.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

Using the interior lightsPush the button on the keyfob once to turnon the interior lights and puddle lamps (if soequipped).

For additional information, refer to “Lights ondemand switch” in the “Instruments and controls”section earlier in this manual.

LPD0262



s1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver’s side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

s2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

s3 Insert the support rod into the slot on theunderside of the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and makesure it locks into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.


● Always be sure that hands and feet areclear of the door frame to avoid injurywhile closing the lift gate.

WPD0338

HOOD LIFT GATE



OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFTGATEThe power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors including the lift gate simulta-neously.

To open the lift gate, depress the opener handleand lift up.

To close, lower and push the lift gate down se-curely.

USING THE MAIN ON/OFF SWITCHFOR THE POWER LIFT GATE (if soequipped)

The main ON/OFF switch is located in the over-head console.

Push the switch ON to enable the rear pillarswitch. An indicator light will illuminate when theswitch is in the ON position.

Push the switch OFF to disable the rear pillarswitch. An indicator light will illuminate when theswitch is in the OFF position. Pushing the switch

OFF while the lift gate is opening or closing willcancel the operation and the lift gate will go tomanual mode.

When the switch is in the OFF position, the liftgate can still be opened with the keyfob or over-head console switch. The lift gate can also beopened manually with the outside handle if the liftgate is unlocked.

LPD0221 WPD0334



OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power liftgate, the shift selector lever must be in P(Park). Also, the power lift gate will notoperate if battery voltage is low.

Power Open:The power lift gate automatically moves from thefully closed position to the fully open position inapproximately 5 – 8 seconds. The power openfeature can be activated by the switch on the

keyfob and the overhead console and by theoutside opener handle. The hazard lights flashand a chime sounds to indicate the power opensequence has been started.

● The lift gate can be opened by the overheadconsole switch and the keyfob even if thevehicle is locked. The lift gate will individuallyunlock and open. Once the lift gate isclosed, its lock will align to the vehicle’s lockor unlock status.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the lift gate opens.

● The lift gate must be unlocked to open it withthe outside opener handle.

● The switch on the rear pillar cannot be usedto open the lift gate.

A warning chime will sound if the shift selectorlever is moved out of P (Park) during a poweropen operation.

Power Close:The power lift gate automatically moves from thefully open position to the secondary position.When the lift gate reaches the secondary posi-tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position. Power closetakes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The powerclose feature can be activated by the switch onthe keyfob, the overhead console and the rearpillar. The hazard lights flash and a chime soundsto indicate the power close sequence has beenstarted.

● If the outside opener handle is activatedwhile the cinching motor is engaged, thecinching motor will disengage and releasethe latch.

● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-ond before the lift gate closes.

● The switch on the rear pillar can only be usedto close the lift gate if the main ON/OFFswitch is ON.

Rear pillar switchWPD0339

Overhead console switchWPD0340



Reverse:The power lift gate will reverse direction immedi-ately during power open or power close if thekeyfob, overhead console or rear pillar switch ispressed. A chime will sound to announce thereversal.

Auto Reverse:If an obstacle is detected during power open orpower close, a warning chime will sound and thelift gate will reverse direction and return to the fullopen or full close position. If a second obstacle isdetected, the lift gate motion will stop and thedrive motor will disengage. The lift gate will entermanual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch stripduring power close, the lift gate will reverse di-rection and return to the full open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the lift gate.

Manual Mode:If power operation is not available, the lift gatemay be operated manually. Power operation maynot be available if the main ON/OFF switch is inthe OFF position, if multiple obstacles have beendetected in a single power cycle, or if batteryvoltage is low.

Safe Mode:If the lift gate gas stays s1 lose pressure, thepower lift gate safe mode is activated. When thesafe mode is activated, the lift gate slowly closes.A continuous warning chime sounds until the liftgate is in the fully down position. Then the lift gatewill be pulled to the closed and latched positionby a motor.

The power lift gate cannot be opened using theswitches at any time in the safe mode.

The auto reverse function remains active whilethe lift gate is closing in the safe mode.

Do not operate the lift gate again until it ischecked by your NISSAN dealer.

LPD0238



CAUTION

● If the power lift gate does not stay openor if the lift gate unexpectedly closes atany time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the lift gate gas stays.Have the lift gate inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power lift gate if oneor both of the lift gate gas stays areremoved. Damage to the lift gate orpower lift gate mechanisms may occur.

LIFT GATE RELEASE

WARNING

● Always be sure the lift gate has beenclosed securely to prevent it from open-ing while driving.

● Do not drive with the lift gate open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

CAUTION

● If the power lift gate does not stay openor if the lift gate unexpectedly closes atany time while a continuous warningchime sounds, do not operate the liftgate. There may be a pressure loss inone or both of the lift gate gas stays.Have the lift gate inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● Do not activate the power lift gate if oneor both of the lift gate gas stays areremoved. Damage to the lift gate orpower lift gate mechanisms may occur.

Manual lift gate (if so equipped)If the lift gate cannot be locked or unlocked withthe door lock switch or the keyfob due to adischarged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate.

2. Move the lever down to lock or up to unlock.

Manual releaseLPD0230



Power lift gate (if so equipped)If the lift gate cannot be opened with the doorlock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery,follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the liftgate.

2. Move the lever up to open the lift gate.

OPENER OPERATIONThe fuel-filler door release is located on the driv-er’s door. To open the fuel-filler door, push therelease. To lock, close the fuel-filler door se-curely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s1 whilerefueling.

Power releaseLPD0236 WPD0341 LPD0232

FUEL-FILLER DOOR



WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.



TILT OPERATIONPull the lock lever forward and adjust the steeringwheel up or down to the desired position.

Push the lock lever back to lock the steeringwheel in place.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust thebrake and accelerator pedal position forward s1or backward s2 . Pedal adjustment can only beperformed when:

● Ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position

● Ignition switch is ON and the selector leveris in the P (Park) position

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad-justed separately.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with yourfoot on the pedal.

WPD0342 WPD0357

STEERING WHEEL PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT (if soequipped)



s1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

s2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

s3 Slide the sun visor in or out as needed.

VANITY MIRRORSTo access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. The vanitymirror will illuminate when the mirror cover isopen.

WPD0344

WPD0345

SUN VISORS



REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)The night position s1 reduces glare from theheadlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position s2 when driving in daylighthours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally changes reflection according to the intensityof the headlights of the vehicle following you.

The indicator light s1 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe O button.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe | button.

For information on HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

WPD0126 WPD0329

MIRRORS



OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

The outside mirror remote control only operateswhen the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position bymoving the control lever.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (ifso equipped)

The outside mirrors will automatically dim duringnighttime conditions to reduce the glare from theheadlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on whenstarting the vehicle. The indicator light on theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminatewhen the automatic anti-glare feature is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, pressthe O button on the rearview mirror.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,press the | button on the rearview mirror

The indicator light will turn on.

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” earlier in this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-tional information, see “Rear window and outsidemirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the“Instrument and controls” section of this manual.

LPD0346



Foldable outside mirrors

Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if soequipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-lected outside mirror surface downward to pro-vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,turn the outside mirror control switch to the left orright position. Only one mirror can be selected ata time.

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). Theselected mirror will turn downward.

The selected mirror surface will return to its origi-nal position when any of the following have oc-curred:

● The shift selector lever is moved to any po-sition other than R (Reverse).

● The outside mirror control switch is set to theN (Neutral) position.

● The ignition switch is turned OFF.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in theneutral position, neither mirror will turndownward when the shift selector lever ismoved to R (Reverse).

For more information regarding this feature, referto “Automatic drive positioner” later in this sec-tion.

The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

MPA0008

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)



MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, acceleratorand brake pedals, and outside mirrors can bestored in the automatic drive positioner memory.Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-tem.

1. Set the automatic transmission selector le-ver to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors to thedesired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additional infor-mation, see “Seats” in the “Safety—Seats,seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-tem” section and “Pedal position adjust-ment” and “Outside mirrors” earlier in thissection.

During this step, do not turn the ignition toany position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for atleast 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memorypositionEach keyfob can be linked to a stored memoryposition (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,press the button on the keyfob. The driv-er’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and out-side mirrors will move to the memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to thememory switch, the keyfob automaticallyre-links.

Confirming memory storage● Turn the ignition ON and push the SET

switch. If the main memory has not beenstored, the indicator light will come on forapproximately 0.5 seconds. When thememory has stored the position, the indica-tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-onds.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the memory storage function willbe canceled and must be restarted before a

WPD0347



stored memory position can be set again.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the memory storage function. Youcan also restart the memory storage functionusing the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

Once the memory storage function has beenrestarted, you can store a memory position.See “Memory storage function” earlier in thissection.

Selecting the memorized positionSet the shift selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion, then:

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’sdoor, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fullyfor at least 1 second, or

● Turn the ignition switch to the ON positionand push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully forat least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, accelerator and brake pedals,and outside mirrors will move to the memorizedposition with the indicator light blinking, and thenthe light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seatwill automatically move when the shift selectorlever is in the P (Park) position. This allows thedriver to get into and out of the driver’s seat moreeasily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

● When the key is removed from the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is opened.

● When the driver’s door is opened with thekey turned to LOCK.

● When the key is turned from ACC to LOCKwith the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat will return to previous position:

● When the key is inserted into the ignitionswitch and the driver’s door is closed.

● When the driver’s door is closed with the keyturned to LOCK.

● When the key is turned from ACC to ONwhile the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audioand phone systems” section of this manual.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the entry/exit function. You can also restartthe entry/exit function using the following proce-dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive positioneris operating.

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.



● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is notpushed and held for at least 1 second.

● When the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

● When the shift selector lever is moved fromP (Park) to any other position.

● When the driver’s door remains open morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled. See “Vehicle electronicsystems” in the “Display screen, heater, air con-ditioner, audio and phone systems” section ofthis manual.




MEMO

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — with monochrome screen . . . . 4-2How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Door warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Control panel buttons — color screen withoutNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . 4-7How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16Control panel buttons — color screen withNavigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . 4-17How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Rearview monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-40

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-44Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50


FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer (Type A and B) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-56CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-62Rear audio controls (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65

DVD entertainment system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 4-65Digital video disc (DVD) player controls . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67Flip-down screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67Playing a digital video disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71How to handle the DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89


WARNING

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

1. TRIP button (P. 4-3)2. brightness control button

(P. 4-6)3. SETTING button (P. 4-5)When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

LHA0616

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHMONOCHROME SCREEN

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems


Reference symbols:

TRIP button — This is a button on the controlpanel. By pressing this button you can select theitem or perform this action.

HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTONWhen the TRIP button is pressed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Dist. to Empty → Average Speed → FuelEconomy → Tire Pressure → Audio or OFF →Dist. to Empty

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to — .

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while the ignitionswitch is OFF is small, the display just beforethe ignition switch is turned OFF may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarilychange the display.

LHA0617

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3


Average speed (MPH or km/h)The Average Speed mode shows the averagespeed since the last reset. To calculate the aver-age speed, driving distance is divided by drivingtime.

For approximately the first 30 seconds after areset or reconnecting the battery cables, thedisplay will show —.

Resetting average speed

The average speed calculation can be reset to 0.Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 2 seconds.

Fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)The Fuel Economy mode shows the average fueleconomy since the last reset.

For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m) after a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show —.

Resetting fuel economy

The fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0.Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 2 seconds.

Tire pressure information

Pressure indication in **psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of the tire pressure figures displayedon the screen does not correspond with theactual order of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature.

LHA0618 LHA0619 LHA0620



In case of low tire pressure, a message “LOWPRESSURE” or “CHECK ALL TIRES” is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — CHECK ALL TIRES.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your NISSAN dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.


HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTON

Pressing the SETTING button will change thesettings menu as follows:

Backlight → Day Mode Brightness → NightMode Brightness → Clock Adjust HOURS →

Clock Adjust MINUTES → Units → Lang → MP3Disp Type (if so equipped) → Audio or OFF →Backlight

BacklightTo turn off the screen, select “OFF” of the Back-light mode by pressing the TUNE button.

The message “Press SETTINGS to resume” willdisplay for approximately 5 seconds then thescreen will turn off.

To turn on the screen, press the SETTING buttonand select “ON” by pressing the TUNE button.

When any button besides SETTING is pressedwith the screen off, the screen turns on for furtheroperation. The screen will turn off automaticallyafter the operation is finished.

Day mode brightnessThe brightness of the screen during the day canbe changed by pressing the TUNE button.

For additional information, see “ button”later in this section.

Night mode brightnessThe brightness of the screen during the night canbe changed by pressing the TUNE button.

For additional information, see “ button”later in this section.

Clock operation

The digital clock displays time when the ignitionkey is in ACC or ON.

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

Clock adjust hours

Press the SETTING button until Clock AdjustHOURS is shown in the display. Press the TUNEbutton up or down to adjust the hour.

Clock adjust minutes

Press the SETTING button again Clock AdjustMinutes is shown in the display. Press the TUNEbutton up or down to adjust the minutes.

To exit the clock adjustment, press the SETTINGbutton repeatedly. The screen will return to theaudio display if the audio is on. If the audio is noton, the screen will return to a blank display.

Units

To change the units press the TUNE button toselect “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”.

Unit: US — MI, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km



LanguageThe language can be changed to “ENGLISH” or“FRANÇAIS” by pressing the TUNE button.

MP3 display type (if so equipped)To change how MP3 discs are displayed, pressthe TUNE button to select “DISC NUMBER” or“FOLDER NUMBER”.

Disc number mode will display the file number inthe disc.

Folder number mode will display the file numberin the current folder.

For additional information, see “Audio System”later in this section.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button with theheadlights off will prompt the “BRIGHTNESSNIGHT (MANUAL)” or “BRIGHTNESS AUTO-MATIC”. If “BRIGHTNESS NIGHT (MANUAL)” isselected, the brightness of the screen will not beaffected by the headlight operation. The bright-ness of the screen will be dependent on thesettings in the Night Mode Brightness, describedearlier in this section.

Pressing the button with the headlights on willprompt the “BRIGHTNESS DAY (MANUAL)” or“BRIGHTNESS AUTOMATIC”. If “BRIGHT-NESS DAY (MANUAL)” is selected the bright-ness of the screen will not be affected by theheadlight operation. The brightness of the screenwill be dependent on the settings in the DayMode Brightness, described earlier in this sec-tion.

DOOR WARNINGThe DOOR OPEN screen will be automaticallydisplayed as shown when both of the followingconditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven with a door(s) open forlonger than 2.5 seconds.

● The vehicle speed is greater than 3 MPH (5km/h).

Beeping will occur during the door warning; todisable the beeping press any button. If a changein any door condition occurs during the time thebeep is cancelled, a warning will return.

LHA0643



1. TRIP button (P. 4-8)2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-7)3. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-7)4. brightness control button

(P. 4-16)

5. SETTING button (P. 4-11)If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel. By pressing this button you can select theitem or perform this action.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK ANDENTER BUTTONUse the joystick to choose an item on the displayscreen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right tohighlight an item. Then press the ENTER buttonto select the item or perform the action.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-cepts the changes made during setup.

Display screen without navigationLHA0621

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLORSCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)



HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON

When the TRIP button is pressed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 →FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audioor OFF → TRIP 1

Each trip display tracks an independent trip anddisplays the following:

● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed - Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting trip 1 and trip 2Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIPbutton to select the TRIP screen to be reset.

● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 1.5 seconds.

Fuel economy

Press the TRIP button to display Average FuelEconomy and Distance To Empty.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show (**.*).

LHA0552 LHA0553




The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly untilthe FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-ther:




The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:



Maintenance itemsPress the TRIP button to display maintenanceinformation or set maintenance intervals for thefollowing:

● Engine Oil

● Tire Rotation

● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)

For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tirepressure information” later in this section.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and press the ENTER button todisplay the screen to change the maintenanceinterval.

Select the “Maintenance Schedule”key using thejoystick and move the joystick to right or left to setthe maintenance interval.

LHA0554 LHA0555



Resetting the maintenance interval

The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte-nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome-ters).

Select the “Reset” key using the joystick andpress the ENTER button.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”key and press the ENTER button to display theMAINTENANCE INFORMATION automaticallyat the set maintenance interval.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINEOIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automaticallydisplayed as shown when both of the followingconditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition key is turned OFF.

● The ignition key is turned ON the next timethe vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● “Reset” key is selected.

● “Display Maintenance Notification” is setOFF.

● The maintenance interval is set again.LHA0556 LHA0483




To display tire pressure information, press theTRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCEscreen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure”key using the joystick and press the ENTER but-ton.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.


In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING



HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-TINGS screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle.Move the joystick and press the ENTER button toselect each item to be set.

LHA0557 LHA0599



Display settingsSelect the “Display” key and press the ENTERbutton. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap-pear.

Brightness/contrast/screen background:

Select the “Brightness/Contrast/Screen Back-ground” key to adjust the brightness and contrastof the screen. Use the joystick to select andadjust the brightness to darker or brighter and thecontrast to lower or higher.

Use the joystick to select the “Screen Back-ground” key. Press the ENTER button or movethe joystick right or left to choose a “Dark” or“Bright” screen background.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKbutton or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the“Display Off” turns amber and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after 5 seconds.

LHA0622 LHA0625 LHA0642



To turn the screen on,

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayOff” key. Then set the screen to on by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Hold the button for approximately 2seconds and the message “resuming dis-play” will appear and the “Display Off” keywill be automatically turned on (no amberindicator).

Lower display setting:

You can choose to display the audio or HVAC(Heater and air conditioner) functions on thelower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis-play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se-lect the “Audio” or “HVAC” key using the joystickor by pressing the ENTER button.


Any time audio information is shown on the mainpart of the screen, HVAC information will bedisplayed on the lower part of the screen. HVACinformation will be shown even if “Audio” is se-lected to be displayed on the lower part of thescreen.

LHA0622 LHA0651



Vehicle electronic systems

Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key byusing the joystick and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMSscreen will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the joystick, thenpressing the ENTER button. The indicator light,box at the left of the selected item, alternatelyturns on and off each time the ENTER button ispressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle: Se-lect so the driver’s seat automatically moves backand returns to the original position for ease of exitand entry.

Remote unlock driver’s door first: Select tochange which doors will unlock first during anunlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless remote response — horn: Select toturn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used whenthe LOCK or UNLOCK button on the keyfob ispressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the displayscreen will not show the current mode. Usethe keyfob to return to the previous modeand re-enable the display screen control.

Keyless remote response — lights: Select toturn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on thekeyfob is pressed.

LHA0559 LHA0564 LHA0565



NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights: Selectto change the sensitivity setting of the automaticheadlights:

● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlightswill come on quicker when the headlightsensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay: Select tochange the setting for the length of time theautomatic headlights remain on after exiting thevehicle.

Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on orturn off the driving speed dependent intermittentwiper function.

Return all settings to default: Select tochange all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMSto their default settings.

System settings

Select the “System Settings” key by using thejoystick and pressing the ENTER button. TheSYSTEM SETTINGS menu will be displayed.

Language/unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressingthe ENTER button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

You can select the language and unit using thejoystick or pressing the ENTER button.

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by pressing the BACK button orany other mode button.

LHA0561



Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours”or “Minutes” key and move thejoystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKor any other mode button.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pressed.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-stick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if theBACK button is pressed, the display will return tothe previous display.

LHA0600



1. ROUTE button*2. DEST button*3. MAP button*4. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-18)5. zoom out button*

6. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-17)7. zoom in button*8. VOICE button*9. SETTING button (P. 4-22)

10. brightness control button(P. 4-28)

11. TRIP button (P. 4-18)*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel. By pressing this button you can select theitem or perform the action.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK ANDENTER BUTTONUse the joystick to choose an item on the displayscreen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right tohighlight an item. Then press the ENTER buttonto select the item or perform the action.

Display screen with navigationLHA0631

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM (if so equipped)



HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-cepts the changes made during setup.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREENWhen you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, thesystem start-up warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the “OK”key by pressing the ENTER button.

If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi-gation system will not proceed to the next step inthe Navigation display.

If you do not touch a button or screen key formore than 1 minute on the system start-up warn-ing screen, the screen will change to the audioscreen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON

When the TRIP button is pressed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 →FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audioor OFF → TRIP 1

Each trip display tracks an independent trip anddisplays the following:

● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed - Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting trip 1 and trip 2Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIPbutton to select the TRIP screen to be reset.



LHA0552



Fuel economy

Press the TRIP button to display Average FuelEconomy and Distance To Empty.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show (**.*).


The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly untilthe FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-ther:




The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:



Maintenance itemsPress the TRIP button to display maintenanceinformation or set maintenance intervals for thefollowing:

● Engine Oil

● Tire Rotation

● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)

For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tirepressure information” later in this section.

LHA0553 LHA0554



Changing the maintenance interval

Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and press the ENTER button todisplay the screen to change the maintenanceinterval.

Select the “Maintenance Schedule”key using thejoystick and move the joystick to right or left to setthe maintenance interval.

Resetting the maintenance interval

The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte-nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome-ters).

Select the “Reset” key using the joystick andpress the ENTER button.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”key and press the ENTER button to display theMAINTENANCE INFORMATION automaticallyat the set maintenance interval.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINEOIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automaticallydisplayed as shown when both of the followingconditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition key is turned OFF.

LHA0555 LHA0556 LHA0483



● The ignition key is turned ON the next timethe vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● “Reset” key is selected.

● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set toOFF.

● The maintenance interval is set again.


To display tire pressure information, press theTRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCEscreen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure”key using the joystick and press the ENTER but-ton.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.


In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING



LHA0557



HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-TINGS screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle.Move the joystick and press the ENTER button toselect each item to be set.

Display settingsSelect the “Display” key and press the ENTERbutton. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap-pear.

Brightness/contrast:

Select the “Brightness/Contrast” key to adjustthe brightness and contrast of the map back-ground. Use the joystick to adjust the brightnessto darker or brighter and the contrast to lower orhigher.


LHA0558 WHA0715 WHA0716



Display off:

Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the“Display Off” turns amber and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on,

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayOff” key. Then set the screen to on by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Hold the button for approximately 2seconds and the message “resuming dis-play” will appear and the “Display Off” keywill be automatically turned on (no amberindicator).

Lower display setting:

You can choose to display the audio or HVAC(Heater and air conditioner) functions on thelower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis-play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se-lect the “Audio” or “HVAC” key using the joystickor by pressing the ENTER button.


LHA0642 WHA0715



Any time audio information is shown on the mainpart of the screen, HVAC information will bedisplayed on the lower part of the screen. HVACinformation will be shown even if “Audio” is se-lected to be displayed on the lower part of thescreen.

Vehicle electronic systems

Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key byusing the joystick and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMSscreen will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the joystick, thenpressing the ENTER button. The indicator light,box at the left of the selected item, alternatelyturns on and off each time the ENTER button ispressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle: Se-lect so the driver’s seat automatically moves backand returns to the original position for ease of exitand entry.

Remote unlock driver’s door first: Select tochange which doors will unlock first during anunlocking operation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless remote response — horn: Select toturn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used whenthe LOCK button on the keyfob is pressed.

LHA0651 LHA0559 LHA0564



NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the displayscreen will not show the current mode. Usethe keyfob to return to the previous modeand re-enable the display screen control.

Keyless remote response — lights: Select toturn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on thekeyfob is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the keyfob, the mode willnot be changed with the display. Use thekeyfob to return to the previous mode andre-enable the display control.

Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights: Selectto change the sensitivity setting of the automaticheadlights:

● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlightswill come on quicker when the headlightsensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay: Select tochange the setting for the length of time theautomatic headlights remain on after exiting thevehicle.

Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on orturn off the driving speed dependent intermittentwiper function.

Return all settings to default: Select tochange all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMSto their default settings.

System settings

Select the “System Settings” key by using thejoystick and pressing the ENTER button. TheSYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.

Language/unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressingthe ENTER button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

LHA0561



You can select the language and unit using thejoystick or pressing the ENTER button.

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by pressing the BACK button orany other mode button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours”or “Minutes” key and move thejoystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.


Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust theclock to daylight savings time.

ON: Automatically adjusts for daylight savingstime.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

LHA0562 LHA0566



Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The TIME ZONE screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones, depend-ing on the current location.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screenwill appear.

LHA0567 LHA0568 LHA0563



The GPS time (manual time) corresponding tothe selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zonehas been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pressed.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

Guidance voice settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-stick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if theBACK button is pressed, the display will return tothe previous display.

When the shift selector lever is shifted into the R(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows theview directly to the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING

● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● The rearview camera is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safeto do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

● Objects viewed in the rearview monitordiffer from actual distance because awide-angle lens is used.

● Make sure that the lift gate is securelyclosed when backing up.

● Do not put anything on the rearviewcamera. The rearview camera is in-stalled beside the license plate light.

● When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing wa-ter condensation on the lens, a mal-function, fire or an electric shock.

● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-function or cause damage resulting in afire or an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.Do not scratch the cover when cleaningdirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINESLines which indicate the vehicle clearance anddistances to objects with reference to thebumper line sA are displayed on the monitor.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if soequipped)



They are indicated as reference distances toobjects. The lines and colors in the display indi-cate distances from the back bumper line sA inthe illustration.

s1 1.5 ft (0.5 m) red

s2 3 ft (1 m) yellow

s3 7 ft (2 m) green

s4 10 ft (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider thanthe actual clearance.

ADJUSTING THE SCREENTo adjust the quality of the screen, refer to “HOWTO USE THE SETTING BUTTON” in this section.

● When it is difficult to see in the rearwarddirection due to shady conditions, press theENTER button to make objects in the moni-tor brighter.

● To change the brightness, press the ENTERbutton again, turn the key switch OFF or shiftto R (Reverse) and wait for 10 seconds.

OPERATING TIPS● When the selector lever is shifted to R (Re-

verse), the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the rearview monitor mode.However, the radio can be heard.

● It may take some time until the rearviewmonitor is displayed after the selector leverhas been shifted to R (Reverse). Objectsmay be distorted momentarily until the rear-view monitor screen is displayed completely.When the selector lever is returned to aposition other than R (Reverse), it may takesome time until the screen changes. Objectson the screen may be distorted until they arecompletely displayed.

● When the temperature is extremely high orlow, the screen may not clearly display ob-jects. This is not a malfunction.

● When strong light directly enters the cam-era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on thescreen. This is due to strong reflected lightfrom the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescentlight. This is not a malfunction.

● The colors of objects on the rearview moni-tor may differ somewhat from those of theactual object.

● When the contrast of objects is low at night,pressing the ENTER button may not changethe brightness.

● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in adark place or at night.

● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,the rearview monitor may not display ob-jects. Clean the camera.

● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner toclean the camera. This will cause discolora-tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a clothdampened with a diluted mild cleaning agentand then wipe with a dry cloth.

LHA0437



● Do not damage the camera as the monitorscreen may be adversely affected.

● Do not use body wax on the camera window.Wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Adjust air flow direction for the driver and pas-senger sides1 , center s2 , and rear passengers3 ventilators by moving the ventilator slideand/or ventilator assemblies.

WHA0626

VENTILATORS



WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

1. Fan speed control dial2. Air conditioner button3. Front window defrost/defog button4. Rear window defroster switch5. Air recirculation button6. Temperature control dial7. Air flow control buttons

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, andcontrols fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to selectthe air flow outlets.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and the front and rearfloor outlets.

— Air flows mainly from the front andrear floor outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outletsand the front and rear flooroutlets.

LHA0627

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(manual)



— Air flows from defroster outlets

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to adjustthe temperature of the outlet air. To lower thetemperature, turn the dial to the left. To increasethe temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

ON position:Push the button to recirculate air insidethe vehicle.

Push the button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.

● to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-senger compartment.

● for maximum cooling when using the air con-ditioner.

OFF position:Push the button again to turn air recircula-tion off. Outside air is drawn into the passengercompartment and distributed through the se-lected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air con-ditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position and push the button toturn on the air conditioner. A/C will appear on thedisplay when the air conditioner is operating. Toturn off the air conditioner, push the buttonagain, the display will show A/C OFF.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch

For more information about the rear window de-froster switch, see “Rear window defrosterswitch” in the “Instruments and controls” sectionof this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to the footoutlets. Some air also flows from the defrostoutlets.

1. Push the button to the OFF positionfor normal heating ( shown on dis-play).

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-tion.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position between the middle and thehot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side andcenter ventilators.

1. Push the button to the OFF position( shown on display).



4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-sired position.

Defrosting or defoggingThis mode directs the air to the defrost outlets todefrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .





● To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-dows, turn the fan control dial to the highestsetting and the temperature control to thefull HOT position.

● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,A/C will not appear on the display) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif an air flow control button other thanis selected. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the sideand center vents and to the front and rear flooroutlets.





Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-shield.




● When the position is selected, the airconditioner automatically turns on (however,A/C will not appear on the display) if theoutside temperature is more than 36°F(2°C). The air conditioning system will con-tinue to operate until the fan control dial isturned to OFF or the vehicle is shut off, evenif an air flow control button other thanis selected. This dehumidifies the air whichhelps defog the windshield. Themode automatically turns off, allowing out-side air to be drawn into the passengercompartment to further improve the defog-ging performance.

Operating tipsClear snow and ice from the wiper bladesand air inlet in front of the windshield. Thisimproves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATIONStart the engine, turn the fan control dial to thedesired position, and push in the button toactivate the air conditioner. When the air condi-tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functionsare added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function oper-ates only when the engine is running.

CoolingThis mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.

1. Push the button to the OFF position.



4. Push the button. A/C will appear onthe display.




● For quick cooling when the outside tem-perature is high, push the button tothe ON position ( shown on display).Be sure to return the to the OFF po-sition for normal cooling ( shown ondisplay).

Dehumidified heatingThis mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.




4. Push the button. The display showsA/C.


Operating tips● Keep the windows closed while the air con-

ditioner is in operation.

● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3minutes with the windows open to vent hotair from the passenger compartment. Then,close the windows. This allows the air con-ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.

● The air conditioning system should beoperated for approximately 10 minutesat least once a month. This helps pre-vent damage to the system due to lackof lubrication.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

● If the engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature over the normal range, turnthe air conditioner off. See “If yourvehicle overheats” in the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTSThe following charts show the button and dialpositions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,cooling or defrosting. For additional informationon heating and cooling see “Heater and air con-ditioner” in this section.The air recirculation( ) button should always be in the OFFposition for heating and defrosting.



WHA0644 WHA0645



WHA0646 WHA0647



WHA0648



WHA0649



WHA0650



1. Driver temperature control dial/AUTO button

2. A/C ON/OFF button3. Fan speed control (decrease)4. Front window defroster button5. System off button6. Rear window defroster button7. Fan speed control (increase)8. Air recirculation button9. Passenger temperature control dial/

DUAL button10. Air flow/MODE buttons

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.


● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round asthe system automatically works to keep a con-stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the driver’s side temperature controldial to the left or right to set the desiredtemperature. Driver and passenger tem-peratures can be set independently. PressDUAL or turn the passenger temperaturecontrol dial to the left or right to activate dualclimate control functions. Turn the passen-ger’s side temperature control dial to the leftor right to set the desired passenger’s tem-perature.

● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

LHA0629

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic) (if so equipped)



● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/offare also controlled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster control button toturn the system on. The display will show thedefrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or rightto set the desired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, press and hold the + but-ton to set the fan speed to maximum.

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return to theauto mode.

● When the DEF control is activated,the air conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperatures above36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for more thanone minute, the air conditioning system willcontinue to operate until the fan control isturned OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or the A/C

button is used to turn off the compressoreven if an air flow MODE button otherthan is selected. This dehumidifiesthe air which helps defog the windshield.The air recirculation mode automaticallyturns off, allowing outside air to be drawninto the passenger compartment to furtherimprove the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control buttons

Press the fan speed control buttons + / –to manually control the fan speed.

Press OFF to turn the system off.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

The mode automatically turns off, allowingoutside air to be drawn into the passenger com-partment to prevent fogging.

Push the air recirculation button to recir-culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push theAUTO button to return to automatic mode.

The air recirculation button will not be activatedwhen the air conditioner is in DEF mode.

Air flow controlPushing the MODE button manually controls airflow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system offPress the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.



The sunload sensor s1 , located on the top centerof the instrument panel, helps the system main-tain a constant temperature. Do not put anythingon or around this sensor.

Rear seat temperature and fan speed can becontrolled from both the front seat overhead con-sole controls sA or the rear seat overhead con-sole controls sB .

Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer controlof the rear climate functions to the rear passen-ger’s.

To operate the rear air conditioner, the enginemust be running.

If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the airconditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fanspeed positions, air is discharged from the rearvents at the corresponding speed.

1. Rear fan speed control dial.2. Rear temperature control dial.

LIC0954 LHA0676 LHA0628

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER



CONTROLS

Fan control dialThe fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on andoff, and controls fan speed.

Temperature control dialThe temperature control dial allows rear passen-gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the POWER/VOLUME control knob toturn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with theengine not running, the key should be turned tothe ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

WHA0630

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM



Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise to comefrom the audio system speakers. Storing the de-vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTIONRange: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FMhaving slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-nal influences may sometimes interfere with FMstation reception even if the FM station is within25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal isdirectly related to the distance between thetransmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-acteristics as light. For example, they will reflectoff objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTIONAM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON andthe vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna canaffect satellite radio performance. Remove theice to restore satellite radio reception



AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

LHA0099



CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 CD).

Compact Disc with MP3Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of theencoded MP3 file that contains informationabout the digital music file such as song title,artist, album title, encoding bit rate, tracktime duration, etc. ID3 tag information isdisplayed on the Album/Artist/Track title lineon the display.

Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with compressed files(MP3) is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3files are not shown in the display.

Playback order chartWHA1090



● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“ROOT” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.



Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512

Text character number limitation 31 characters

Displayable character codes01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:(UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.



Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder namesand file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “.MP3” or “.mp3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. PRESET A·B·C button3. CD/DVD button4. Station select (1 - 6) buttons5. POWER/VOLUME control knob6. REAR CTRL button

7. AUX button8. TUNE/CAT button9. DISP button10. FM·AM/SAT (satellite) radio button*11. SCAN/RPT button12. Rear speaker control button

13. AUDIO button [BASS, MID, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV (if soequipped)]

14. CD eject button15. AUX jack16. CD insert slot

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna areinstalled, and an XMT satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satelliteradio not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-tion precautions9 earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

LHA0634



Audio main operation

Power/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the POWER/VOLUME control knob whilethe system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE,BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid, Treble, Fade and Balance,press the AUDIO button until the desired modeappears in the display. Press the TUNE button toadjust Bass, Mid and Treble to the desired level.You can also use the TUNE Button to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, press the TUNE button.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button:

This DISP (display) button will show text aboutMP3 (if so equipped), CD or SAT information inthe audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Track number ←→ Disc title ←→ Track title.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.

● Track number mode displays the numberselected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played on the disc.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to anMP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is beingused), press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill scroll through the CD text as follows: Folder,Artist and Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artisttitle → Track title.

To change the default display mode, press theSETTING button repeatedly until MP3 Disp Typeappears on the display, then press the TUNEbutton to select the following display modes:Folder number ←→ Disc number.

Once a display mode is selected, press the SET-TING button again to store the setting.

● Folder number mode displays the foldernumber and the file number of the foldercurrently being played.

● Disc number mode displays the number se-lected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.



To change the default display mode press theAUDIO button to display mode and press theTUNE button to select the following displaymodes: Channel number ←→ Channel name←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isselected press the AUDIO button again to storethe setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressedafter 8 seconds the display will refresh with thelast selected display mode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.

● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the FM·AM or SAT (satellite - if soequipped) radio select button will change theband as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT*

When FM·AM or SAT* radio select button ispressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON, the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressedON.

*No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM orSAT* radio select button is pressed, the compactdisc will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

To manually tune the radio, press the TUNEbutton or .

To move quickly through the channels, hold eitherthe or button down for more than1.5 seconds.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.SCAN RPT tuning:

Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPTbutton is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCANtuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SATradio to the A, B and C preset button in anycombination of AM, FM or SAT* stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radiomutes when the select button is pressed).



3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

* SAT presets are only available on SAT equippedvehicles.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band) and/orSAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in largecities, but many stations are now consideringbroadcasting RDS data.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing thePOWER/VOLUME control knob will start thecompact disc.

CD/DVD button:

When the CD/DVD button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the CD/DVD button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK (Fast For-ward and Rewind):

When the SEEK/TRACK button is pressed formore than 1.5 seconds, (fast forward)or (rewind) while the compact disc is be-ing played, the compact disc will play while fastforwarding or rewinding. When the button is re-leased, the compact disc will return to normalplay speed.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Press

several times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thenext track will start to play from its beginning.Press several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pressed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

When the or button is pressed formore than 1.5 seconds, the CD will fast forwardor rewind.

SCAN/RPT:

When the SCAN/RPT button is pressed whilethe compact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

1 DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → 1 DISC RDM

1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly.



REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rearseat audio controller on. REAR CTRL ON willdisplay. Pressing it again will turn the rear seataudio controller off. REAR CTRL OFF will display.If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seataudio controller, the display will show “REAR AVN/A”.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-log audio input such as from a portable cassettetape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop com-puter.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

(SPEAKER CONTROL) button:

Press this button to turn the rear speakersoff and the headphones on. Press thisbutton again to turn rear seat speakers back onand the headphones off.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the compact disc willeject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when theCD is loaded with the system on.



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. PRESET A·B·C button3. CD/DVD button4. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons5. POWER/VOLUME control knob

6. REAR CTRL button7. AUX button8. TUNE/FLDR·CAT button9. DISP button10. FM·AM/SAT (satellite) radio button*

11. SCAN/RPT button12. Rear speaker control button13. AUDIO button [BASS, MID, TREBLE,

FADE, BALANCE and SSV (if soequipped)]

14. CD load button15. CD eject button16. CD insert slot17. AUX jack


Type ALHA0635



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. PRESET A·B·C button3. CD/DVD button4. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons5. POWER/VOLUME control knob

6. REAR CTRL button7. AUX button8. TUNE/FLDR·CAT button9. DISP button10. SCAN button

11. FM·AM/SAT (satellite) radio selectbutton*

12. Rear speaker control button13. RPT·RDM button14. AUDIO button [BASS, MID, TREBLE,

FADE, BALANCE and SSV (if soequipped)]

15. CD load button16. CD eject button17. CD insert slot18. AUX jack


FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER(Type A and B) (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-tion precautions9 earlier in this section.

Type BLHA0636



No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio notavailable in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

Power/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the POWER/VOLUME control knob whilethe system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE,BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO button to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid, Treble, Fade and Balance,press the AUDIO button until the desired modeappears in the display. Press the TUNE button toadjust Bass, Mid and Treble to the desired level.You can also use the TUNE Button to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts thesound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, press the TUNE button.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button:

This DISP (display) button will show text aboutMP3 (if so equipped), CD or SAT information inthe audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Track number ←→ Disc title ←→ Track title.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.

● Track number mode displays the numberselected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played on the disc.

MP3 display mode (if so equipped)

To change the text displayed when listening to anMP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is beingused), press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill scroll through the CD text as follows: Folder,Artist and Track title ←→ Folder title ←→ Artisttitle → Track title.

To change the default display mode, press theAUDIO button repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then press the TUNEbutton to select the following display modes:Folder number ←→ Disc number.

Once a display mode is selected, press the AU-DIO button again to store the setting.

● Folder number mode displays the foldernumber and the file number of the foldercurrently being played.

● Disc number mode displays the number se-lected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played.



Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode press theAUDIO button to display mode and press theTUNE button to select the following displaymodes: Channel number ←→ Channel name←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isselected press the AUDIO button again to storethe setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressedafter 8 seconds the display will refresh with thelast selected display mode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.

● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the FM·AM or SAT (satellite - if soequipped) radio select button will change theband as follows:

AM ←→ FM or SAT*

When FM·AM or SAT* radio select button ispressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON, the radio will come on at the station lastplayed.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressedON.

*No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT satellite radioservice subscription is active. Satellite radio isnot available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM orSAT* radio select button is pressed, the compactdisc will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

To manually tune the radio, press theTUNE/FLDR·CAT button or .To move quickly through the channels, hold eitherthe or button down for more than1.5 seconds.

SEEK tuning:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

SCAN RPT tuning (Type A only):

Press the SCAN RPT button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station(AM, FM or SAT if so equipped) for 5 seconds.Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN RPTbutton is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCANtuning moves to the next station.

SCAN tuning (Type B only):

Press the SCAN button for more than 1.5 sec-onds to stop at each broadcasting station for 5seconds. Pressing the button again during this 5second period will stop SCAN tuning and theradio will remain tuned to that station. If the



SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds,SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

Station memory operations:

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SATradio to the A, B and C preset button in anycombination of AM, FM or SAT* stations.

1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to changebetween storage banks. The radio displaysthe icon A, B or C to indicate which set ofpresets are active.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radiomutes when the select button is pressed).

3. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Memorizing is nowcomplete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

* SAT presets are only available on SAT equippedvehicles.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band) and/orSAT radio encoded within a regular radio broad-cast. Currently, most RDS stations are in largecities, but many stations are now consideringbroadcasting RDS data.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position.To insert the disc, first press the LOAD button.Insert the compact disc into the slot with the labelside facing up. The compact disc will be guidedautomatically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing thePOWER/VOLUME control knob will start thecompact disc.

CD LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pressthe load button for less than 1.5 seconds.Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insertselect button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, pressthe load button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD/DVD button:

When the CD/DVD button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the CD/DVD button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded with the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pressed while a com-pact disc is playing, the track being played re-turns to its beginning. Press several times to skipback through tracks. The compact disc will goback the number of times the button is pressed.

When the button is pressed while thecompact disc is playing, the next track will start toplay from its beginning. Press several times toskip through tracks. The compact disc will ad-vance the number of times the button is pressed.(When the last track on the compact disc isskipped through, the first track will be played.)



TUNE/FLDR·CAT(Folder·Catalog):

While playing an MP3, press theTUNE/FLDR·CAT button or to scanthrough available folders.

TUNE/FLDR·CAT (FastForward and Rewind):

When the TUNE/FLDR·CAT button is pressed formore than 1.5 seconds, (fast forward)or (rewind) while the compact disc is be-ing played, the compact disc will play while fastforwarding or rewinding . When the button isreleased, the compact disc will return to normalplay speed.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

SCAN/RPT (Type A only):

When the SCAN/RPT button is pressed whilethe compact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

1 DISC REPEAT → 1 TRACK REPEAT → ALLDISC RANDOM → 1 DISC RANDOM

1 DISC REPEAT: The disc that is currently play-ing will be repeated

1 TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currentlyplaying will be repeated.ALL DISC RANDOM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly.1 DISC RANDOM: Tracks from the disc that iscurrently playing will be played randomly.

RPT·RDM button (Type B only):

When the RPT·RDM button is pressed while thecompact disc is played, the play pattern can bechanged as follows:

1 DISC REPEAT→ 1 TRACK REPEAT → ALLDISC RANDOM → 1 DISC RANDOM

1 DISC REPEAT: The disc that is currently play-ing will be repeated.1 TRACK REPEAT: The track that is currentlyplaying will be repeated.ALL DISC RANDOM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly.1 DISC RANDOM: Tracks from the disc that iscurrently playing will be played randomly.

REAR CTRL:

Pressing the REAR CTRL button turns the rearseat audio controller on. REAR CTRL ON willdisplay. Pressing it again will turn the rear seataudio controller off. REAR CTRL OFF will display.If the vehicle is not equipped with a rear seataudio controller, the display will show “REAR AVN/A”.


Press this button to turn the rear speakersoff and the headphones on. Press thisbutton again to turn rear seat speakers back onand the headphones off.

CD EJECT:

Current/Selected disc:

● Press the button, then press the slotnumber (1 – 6) for the desired disc. Thecompact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loadeddisc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected discis not removed within 15 seconds, the discwill reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.



CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-log audio input such as from a portable cassettetape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop com-puter.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0049



1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

1. Volume control switch2. Phone operation switch3. POWER on and MODE select switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROLThe audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switchWith the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition keyturned to the ACC or ON position, push theMODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch

Push the MODE select switch to change themode in the following sequence: PRESET A →PRESET B → PRESET C → CD → DVD (if soequipped) → AUX.

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,B or C), use the tuning switch or toselect one of the preset radio stations (1-6).

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,B or C), push the tuning switch orfor less than 1.5 seconds to change to the nextpreset station in memory.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch or for morethan 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previousradio station.

Type AWHA0640

Type BWHA0637



Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

This system searches for the blank intervals be-tween selections. If there is a blank interval within1 program or there is no interval between pro-grams, the system may not stop in the desired orexpected location.

Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the SEEK tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to change the playingdisc up or down.

1. VOL (volume) control button2. MODE select button3. speaker control button4. NEXT button5. SEEK button6. Headphone jacks

7. Infrared headphone transmitter lens*

*Red transmitters will be visible wheninfrared headphones are on.

LHA0322



REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (if soequipped)

Press the REAR CTRL button on the front radiocontrol panel to turn the rear controls on. Pressthe button again to turn the rear controls off.

The headphones symbol illuminates on the frontdisplay when the rear audio controls are on. Twoheadphone jacks are provided so two rear seatpassengers may listen to the audio system pri-vately.

The rear volume controls can only increase thevolume to the level at which the front radio volumecontrol is set.

One or two (if so equipped) infrared headphonesare included if the vehicle is equipped with theDVD entertainment system. Most portable radioheadphones work with the rear audio controls.

For vehicles equipped with the FM/AM/SAT radiowith compact disc player, if the rear passengersturn off the rear speakers and are using head-phones they may choose to listen to a differentmedia than the front passengers. The rear pas-sengers can listen to the radio along with thefront passengers or they can listen to a CD orSAT radio (if so equipped).

VOL (volume) button:

The VOL button allows the rear passengers toadjust the headphone volume level. The vehiclevolume can also be changed if the REAR CTRL isenabled and the rear audio mode is the same asthe front.


Press this button to turn the rear speakersoff and headphones on. Press this buttonagain to turn rear seat speakers back on andheadphones off.

MODE button (Type A only):

The MODE button allows the rear passengers tochange between AM, FM, CD, DVD, AUX jackand AUX(SAT) (if so equipped). The media op-tions are listed on the face plate of the rear audiocontrols. When a source of media is selected, themedia label will be illuminated.

MODE button (Type B and C):

The MODE button allows the rear passengers tochange between AM, FM, CD, DVD and AUX-(SAT) (is so equipped). The media options arelisted on the face plate of the rear audio controls.When a source of media is selected, the medialabel will be illuminated.

NOTE:

The AUX jack can only be turned on by thefront control panel.

For additional information on the AUX jack, see“AUX (Axiliary) button” earlier in this section.

SEEK button:

In AM or FM mode, the SEEK button allows therear seat passengers to find the next radio stationup or down the station band frequency.

In CD mode, the SEEK button allows the rearpassengers to find the next or previous selectionon the CD.

NEXT button:

When the NEXT button is pressed while in AM,FM or SAT mode (if so equipped), the radio willchange to the next preset.

When playing a CD in the CD changer (if soequipped), press the NEXT button to changebetween discs when multiple discs are loaded.

The NEXT button does not function while playinga DVD or single CD.



ANTENNAWindow antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearpassenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear driver or passenger side windowglass or attach any metal parts to it. Thismay cause poor reception or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the reardriver or passenger side window, becareful not to scratch or damage thewindow antenna. Lightly wipe along theantenna with a dampened soft cloth. WARNING

● The DVD Entertainment System is de-signed for rear seat passenger viewingonly.

● The driver must not attempt to operatethe DVD Entertainment System whilethe vehicle is in motion so that full at-tention may be given to vehicleoperation.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● Use a damp, soft cloth when cleaningthe DVD Entertainment System compo-nents. Do not use solvents or cleaningsolutions.

● To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-tery, do not operate the system morethan 15 minutes without starting theengine.

Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)]

LHA0641

DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (if soequipped)



1. EJECT button2. DVD slot3. ENTER button4. POWER on/off button5. MODE button6. Input jacks7. STOP button8. PLAY/PAUSE button9. MENU button10. DISPLAY button11. NAVIGATION keys

DIGITAL VIDEO DISC (DVD) PLAYERCONTROLSRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

1. POWER button2. STOP button3. NEXT TRACK/CHAPTER and

PREVIOUS TRACK/CHAPTER button4. TITLE button5. ENTER button

LHA0316

LHA0317



6. DISPLAY button7. MODE button8. SUBTITLE button9. AUDIO button10. ANGLE button11. CLEAR button12. PAUSE button13. PLAY button14. FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE

button15. MENU button16. NAVIGATION keys17. BACK button18. NUMERIC KEYPADREMOTE CONTROLRefer to “Playing a digital video disc (DVD)” laterin this section for the function of each button.

FLIP-DOWN SCREEN

The flip-down screen has a wireless remote con-trol receiver s1 located at the bottom of thescreen.

On vehicles equipped with 2 screens for secondand third row passengers, both screens will havea remote control receiver.

CAUTION

● The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hard orsharp object. If the glass breaks, do nottouch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

● The screen rotates down to view and upinto the housing to store when not inuse. Ensure that the screen is latchedsecurely into the housing when stored.

LHA0315



Headphones

Power ON/OFF:

Press the power button to turn the headphoneson or off.

Volume control:

Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-ume.

The headphones will automatically be turned offin 30 seconds if there is no sound during thatperiod. To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, keep the power supply turned off whennot in use.

NOTE:

For optimum infrared headphone perfor-mance, increase the volume on the rearseat controller to the maximum level andadjust the infrared headphone volume us-ing the volume control on the headphones.Using a lower volume setting on the rearseat controller can cause static noise in theinfrared headphones.

PLAYING A DIGITAL VIDEO DISC(DVD)

CAUTION

● Only operate the DVD while the vehicleengine is running. Operating the DVDfor extended periods of time with theengine OFF can discharge the vehiclebattery.

● Do not allow the system to get wet.Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-uids may cause the system tomalfunction.

● The driver must not attempt to wear theheadphones while the vehicle is in mo-tion so that full attention may be givento vehicle operation.

● While playing video CD media, this DVDplayer does not guarantee completefunctionality of all video CD formats.

With the DVD player, you can hear DVD videos,video CDs and CDs using headphones. Passen-gers in the rear seat can enjoy the sound inde-pendently of the front seat.

Press the CD/DVD button located on the frontcontrols to hear the sound of the DVD playerthrough the speakers.

SAA0720 SAA0721



Pressing the button on the front controlsturns the rear speakers on and off.

It is possible to operate the DVD player by remotecontrol.

Headphones are a wireless type and no cablesare necessary. You can use them in almost all theranges in the rear seat. (It is not possible to usethe headphones in the front seat.)

POWER on/off button:

With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or ONposition, press the POWER button to turn theDVD player on or off.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label sidefacing up. The DVD will be guided automaticallyinto the slot.

If the DVD player is off and a DVD is inserted, theDVD player will automatically turn on.

CAUTION

Do not force the compact disc into theslot. This could damage the player.

MODE select button:

Press the MODE button to select Audio/Videosource between DVD and AUX input (input jacks

on the faceplate, Red = right channel audio input,White = left channel audio input, and Yellow =Video input).

The display will show the “AUX” in the upper leftcorner of the display for 4 seconds once theMode is changed to AUX.

To use the input jacks, refer to “Auxiliary inputjacks” in this section.

or PLAY:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PLAY button on the remote control ispressed, the player will play.

In play mode, the display will briefly showon the upper left corner of the display.

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Remote control only):

Press FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons to carry out the fast forward or fast reversepresentation at 5 times normal play speed.

Press FAST FORWARD/FAST REVERSE but-tons again or PLAY button to resume the normalplay speed.

NEXT CHAPTER/PREVIOUS CHAPTER(Remote control only):

When the (NEXT CHAPTER) button ispressed while the DVD is being played, the pro-gram next to the present one will start to play fromits beginning. Press several times to skip throughprograms. The DVD will advance the number oftimes the button is pressed. When the(PREVIOUS CHAPTER) button is pressed, theprogram being played returns to its beginning.Press several times to skip back through pro-grams. The DVD will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

or PAUSE:

When the PLAY/PAUSE button on the player orthe PAUSE button on the remote control ispressed, the player will pause playing of themedia. In pause mode, the player will showon the upper left corner of the display until theplayer is changed to another mode.

STOP:

Press the STOP button once to stop playing themedia. The display will show in the upperleft corner of the display for 4 seconds, and thelast disc position will be stored. When the PLAY



button is pressed again, it will resume at thestored disc track and time position.

If the STOP button is pressed again when theplayer is already in Stop mode, it will reinitializethe pointer to the beginning of the disc. In effect itwill ignore the last stored disc position and uponreceipt of the next play message it will begin atthe Title Menu, or at “the beginning of the disc”.

EJECT:

When the EJECT button is pressed with the DVDloaded, it will be ejected.

The display will show the EJECT symbol inthe upper left corner of the display for 4 secondsonce the EJECT button is pressed.

If the DVD is not loaded, the display will show“NO DISC”.

If the DVD comes out and is not removed within25 seconds, it will be pulled back into the slot toprotect it.

DISPLAY:

If the DISPLAY control is pressed for less than 2seconds, the display menu will appear on thescreen.

● The display menu will remain on the screenfor 10 seconds if no subsequent controlactivations occur.

● Use NAVIGATION KEYS to navigate withinthe display menu, and use ENTER to selectthe item.

● Holding the DISPLAY control on the face-plate for longer than approximately 2 sec-onds while in the display menu will reset thedisplay characteristics to their nominal val-ues. (Faceplate feature only)

If the DISPLAY control button on the faceplate ispressed for more than 2 seconds, the mediatrack/time information will be displayed along thebottom of the display. Pressing the DISPLAYcontrol for more than 2 seconds will remove themedia track/time information from the display.(Faceplate feature only)

NAVIGATION KEYS:

If media is in PLAY mode, activation of the NAVI-GATION KEYS (Up, Down, Left, and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track, fast re-verse and fast forward, and the display willshow , , and respec-tively in the upper left corner of the display for 4seconds. (Faceplate feature only)

If media is in PAUSE mode, activation of theNAVIGATION KEYS (Up, Down and Right) willperform the following functions: nextchapter/track, previous chapter/track and slow

forward, and the display will show ,and a forward arrow symbol respectively in theupper left corner of the display for 4 seconds.(Faceplate feature only)

If media is in activated MENU mode, the NAVI-GATION KEYS will be used to navigate Up,Down, Left, and Right within the menu.

If display control menu is on, the NAVIGATIONKEYS will be used to navigate Up, Down, Left,and Right within the menu.

ENTER:

In MENU mode, press the ENTER button to se-lect MENU items.

In the display menu, press the ENTER button toselect items for modification, as per the on-screen instructions.

MENU:

If the media is in PLAY mode and the MENUbutton is pressed, the DVD menu will appear onthe screen. Use Navigation Keys to navigatewithin the menu, and use ENTER to select theitem.

Press the MENU button again to return to PLAYmode.



TITLE (Remote control only):

Press TITLE button to return the DVD media tothe “title” of the DVD.

Press TITLE button again to return to the previousstop point and play.

BACK (Remote control only):

Press the BACK button to exit the current activemenu and return to the previous menu.

SUBTITLE (Remote control only):

Press the SUBTITLE button to call up subtitleselection menu.

Repeatedly press the SUBTITLE button to cyclethrough each available subtitle.

AUDIO (Remote control only):

Press the AUDIO button to call up audio menu.

Repeatedly press the AUDIO button to cyclethrough each available audio track.

ANGLE (Remote control only):

Press the ANGLE button to call up camera anglemenu.

Repeatedly press the ANGLE button to cyclethrough each available angle.

CLEAR (Remote control only):

Press the CLEAR button to clear all numericinputs, if actuated prior to expiration of the3-second timer.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (0–9 & ≥10) (Remotecontrol only):

Press the NUMERIC KEYPAD to directly accessdisc chapters, titles or tracks by inputting theirnumeric value.

The “≥10” button input numbers greater than orequal to 10, allowing up three digits to be inputfor selecting chapter/title/track number.

The subsequent actuation of numeric buttons willcontinuously shift the previously input number tothe “left”.

The chapter/title/track number will be automati-cally selected (if valid, based on media content) if3 seconds expire without any keypad inputs.

The operator can cancel the inputchapter/title/track number by actuating theCLEAR control prior to the expiration of the3-second timer.

These functions can be used only for the DVDdiscs which correspond to them.

Auxiliary input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located on the controlpanel. Compatible devices such as video games,camcorders and portable video players can beconnected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-tion purposes.

● Yellow - video input

● White - left channel audio input

● Red - right channel audio input

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean thesurfaces of your DVD Entertainment System.(DVD player face, screen, remote control, etc.)

CAUTION

● Do not use any solvents or cleaningsolutions when cleaning the videosystem.

● Do not use excessive force on the moni-tor screen.

● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-tor screen as it may become dirty ordamaged.



Do not attempt to use the system in extremetemperature conditions [below -4°F (-20°C) orabove 158°F (70°C)]

Do not attempt to operate the system in extremehumidity conditions (less than 10% or more than75%).

HOW TO HANDLE THE DVD

CAUTION

● Handle a DVD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.

● Do not use a conventional recordcleaner, benzine, thinner or alcohol in-tended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on its innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges using the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

● Never attempt to use a DVD that hasbeen cracked, deformed, or repairedusing adhesive. Doing so may causedamage to the equipment.

● Handle the DVD carefully to avoid contami-nation or flaws. Otherwise, signals may notbe read properly.

● Do not write, draw or attach anything on anyside of the DVD.

● Do not store the DVD in locations with directsunlight or in high temperatures or humidity.

● Always place discs in the storage case whenthey are not being used.

● Do not put on any sticker or write anythingon either surface of the DVD.

LHA0049



DVD player operation precautions

Do not use the following DVDs as they maycause the DVD player to malfunction:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter.

● DVDs with a region code other than“1”. The region code sA is displayed ina small symbol printed on the top ofthe DVD sB .

● DVDs that are not round.

● DVDs with a paper label.

● DVDs that are warped, scratched, orhave unequal edges.

● Recordable digital video discs(DVD+R).

● Rewritable digital video discs(DVD+RW).

If a DVD with a paper label is used andbecomes jammed, you may be able to resetthe unit and eject the jammed disc with thefollowing procedure:

1. Record the radio presets.

2. Disconnect the negative terminal fromthe battery for five minutes.

3. Reconnect the negative battery termi-nal.

4. Check to see if the jammed DVD hasbeen ejected. If it has not, try to ejectthe DVD by pushing the eject button.

5. If the disc cannot be ejected see yourNISSAN dealer for further assistance.

6. Re-program the radio presets.

LHA0484



Remote control and headphonesbattery replacement

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid.

2. Replace batteries with new ones.

● Size AA (remote control)

● Size AAA (headphones)

Make sure that the and ends onthe batteries match the markings inside thecompartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, close the lid se-curely.

● If you will not be using the remote control forlong periods of time, remove the batteries.

● Replacement of the batteries is neededwhen the remote control only functions atextremely close distances to the DVD playeror not at all.

● Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

● An improperly disposed battery can harmthe environment. Always confirm local regu-lations for battery disposal.

● When changing batteries, do not let dust oroil get on the remote control and head-phones.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment. This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210of Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interference,and (2) this device must accept any inter-ference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation of thedevice.

LHA0318 SAA0723



When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions, otherwise the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● If you are unable to devote full attentionto vehicle operation while talking onthe phone, pull off the road to a safelocation and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM (if so equipped)



Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap-proved BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, youcan set up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

module when the ignition switch is turned to theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different BluetoothTcellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-mended phone list and pairing.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive a cellular signal; suchas in a tunnel, in an underground parkinggarage, near a tall building or in a moun-tainous area.

LHA0638



– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

● When the radio wave condition is not idealor ambient sound is too loud, it may bedifficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-ing a call.

● Do not place the cellular phone in an areasurrounded by metal or far away from thein-vehicle phone module to prevent tonequality degradation and wireless connectiondisruption.

● While a cellular phone is connected throughthe BluetoothT wireless connection, the bat-tery power of the cellular phone may dis-charge quicker than usual. The BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System cannot chargecellular phones.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

● Some cellular phones or other devices maycause interference or a buzzing noise tocome from the audio system speakers. Stor-ing the device in a different location mayreduce or eliminate the noise.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manualregarding the telephone charges, cellularphone antenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-ronment. This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20cm) between the radiator and your body. ThisTransmitter must not be co-located or operatingin conjunction with any other antenna or transmit-ter.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the BluetoothT PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the amber light on the overhead console illumi-nates and the system is ready to accept voicecommands. If the button is pressed beforethe initialization completes, the system will an-nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready”and will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.



Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. The light on the overhead con-sole flashes to signal you have entered a voicerecognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds,speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correction”any time the system is waiting for a response.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press the button on the steeringwheel at any time. Whenever the VR sessionis cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

● In most cases you can interrupt the voice feed-back to speak the next command by pressingthe button on the steering wheel.

● To speed the operation you can say multiplecommands. For example, press thebutton then say “Phonebook, New entry”rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voicefeedback prompt then say “New entry”.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred.

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two oh oh”

● You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # atany time in any position of the phone number.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.



CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SENDPress the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See “Listof voice commands” and “During a call”later in this section for more information.

PHONE/ENDPress the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTEDThe following procedures will help you getstarted using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” later in this section.

Choosing a languageYou can interact with the BluetoothT Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in thissection.

4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). Use the following chart to selectthe language.

NOTE:

You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press(PHONE/SEND)

to select

Press(PHONE/END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

LHA0639



Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

“Setup” sA

“Pair phone” sB

“New phone” sC

Initiate from handset sD

Name phone sE

Assign priority sF

Choose ringtone sG

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Setup” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” sB . The system acknowl-edges the command and announces thenext set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone” sC . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset sD .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemodel. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for thephone sE .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority levelsF . The priority level determines whichphone is active when more than one pairedBluetoothT phone is in the vehicle. Followthe instructions provided by the system orrefer to “Setup” later in this section for moreinformation on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to selecta custom ring tone sG . Follow the instruc-tions provided by the system or refer to“Setup” later in this section for more infor-mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu

“Call” sA

Number (speak digits) sB

“Dial” sC

1. Press the button on steering wheel. Atone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.



3. Say the number you wish to call sB . Forexample, 555-1212 can be said as “five fivefive one two one two.” See “How to saynumbers” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

4. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” sC . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a callWhen you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

“Call”

“Phone Book”

“Memo Pad”

“Setup”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commandscurrently available any time the system is waitingfor a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system,you can talk ahead by saying more than onecommand at a time. For example, say, “Call fivefive five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone bypressing the button on the steering wheel.However, if you press the button when thesystem is waiting for a response from you it willend the VR session.

“Call”

Main Menu

“Call”

Name (speak name) sA


“Redial” sC

“Call Back” sD

Name (speak name) sA

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learnhow to store entries.



When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.


When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”earlier in this section for more details.

“Redial” sC

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” sD

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers during a call. Forexample, if you were directed to dial an ex-tension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-mand again to return to a hands-free callthrough the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.



“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

“Phone Book”

“New Entry” sA

“Edit” sB

“Delete” sC

9List Names” sD

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system. Each name canhave up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-ated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” sA

Use the New Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and youconfirm it is correct, the system asks for a location(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”See “How to say numbers” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say 9Transfer entry.9 The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phone

number will be transferred from the cellularphone via the BluetoothT communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers or transferring an entry, choose“Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber. The system then asks if you would like tostore another location for the same name. If youdo not wish to store another location, the systemends the VR session.

“Edit” sB

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phonenumber to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asksyou for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.



The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number orto transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellularphone’s memory:

Say 9Transfer entry.9 The system acknowledgesthe command and asks you to initiate the transferfrom the phone handset. The new contact phonenumber will be transferred from the cellularphone via the BluetoothT communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to eachcellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for details. You can also visitwww.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructionson transferring phone numbers from NISSANrecommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber, then announces that the entry has beenstored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

Use the Delete command to erase one entry fromthe phone book, all entries from the phone book,the current redial number or the current call backnumber.

To delete entries from the phone book, say aname or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-tem.

The system acknowledges the command andasks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call backnumber, say “redial number” or “call back num-ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, thesystem deletes them without asking for confirma-tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying todelete, the system says so and ends the VRsession.

“List names” sD

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete, thesystem goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record” sA

“Play” sB

“Delete” sC

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voicememos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Record” sA

The system announces “Recording” and a tonesounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.When you are done, press the orbutton on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to endthe VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wishto record over the oldest memo.



“Play” sB

The system plays back all the memos in the orderof newest to oldest. The system ends the VRsession.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an-nounces “No messages to play.” The systemends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

The Delete command erases all memos. Thesystem asks you to confirm this action beforedeleting all memos.

“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone” sA

“List Phone” sB

“Select Phone” sC

“Change Priority” sD

“Delete Phone” sE

“Select Ringtone” sF

“Bluetooth Off” sG

Use the Setup command to change options as-sociated with the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

“Pair phone” sA

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone tothe BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled. Also, see“Pairing procedure” earlier in this sectionfor additional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair asixth phone, the system announces that you mustfirst delete one phone or replace an existingphone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already beenpaired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-nounces the name the phone is already using.The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from thefollowing commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”earlier in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announcesthe names of the phones already paired andasks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone youwish to replace, the pairing procedure willbegin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier inthis section.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone” sB

Use the List Phone command to hear the namesof the phones currently paired. If no phones arepaired, the system announces, “No pairedphones to list.” The system then ends the VRsession.

“Select phone” sC

Use the Select Phone command to select aphone of lesser priority when two or more phonespaired with BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone andconfirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selectedphone remains active until the ignition switch isturned OFF or you select a new phone.



“Change priority” sD

Use the Change Priority command to change thepriority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac-tive when more than one paired BluetoothTphone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the activephone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4,5).

If the new priority level is already being used foranother phone, the two phones will swap prioritylevels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C toLevel 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” sE

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aspecific phone or all phones from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phonesalready paired with the system and their prioritylevel. The system then gives you the option todelete a specific phone, all phones or listen to thelist again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones,the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also bedeleted.

“Select ringtone” sF

Use the Select Ringtone command to select thetone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call isreceived.

The system announces the name of the activephone and asks you to choose from the followingcommands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtoneand asks if you would like to select that tone.If you say “No”, the system plays the nextringtone available and continues to cyclethrough the ringtones until you select one orquit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirmyour wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off” sG

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off theBluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.

When the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is off, you will not be able to make or receivecalls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, youwill not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and accessSetup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODESpeaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will usememory A to store the model. If memory A is inuse and memory B is available, the system willuse memory B to store the model. If both of thememory locations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location shouldbe overwritten.



Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier inthis section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, the press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.Follow the instructions to register yourname.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrasesDuring the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes

● No

● select ring tone

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone



● dial eight three zero five one

● Home

● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDEThe system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.




MEMO

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Traction Control System (TCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24


WARNING


● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the lift gate and rear vent windowsclosed while driving, otherwise exhaustgases could be drawn into the passen-ger compartment. If you must drive withthe lift gate or rear vent windows open,follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the lift gate or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and check yourtires as soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can leadto tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-cle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres-sure of the spare tire.

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

Starting and driving 5-3


● The low tire pressure warning light does notautomatically turn off when the tire pressureis adjusted. After the tire is inflated to therecommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tirepressure warning light. Use a tire pressuregauge to check the tire pressure.

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen.The order of the tire pressure figures dis-played on the screen does not correspondwith the actual order of the tire position. See“Tire pressure information” in the “Displayscreen, heater, air conditioner and audio andphone systems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section for changing aflat tire.)



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarilyinterfere with the operation of the TPMS andcause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-minate.



Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radiofrequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies isbeing used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or aDC/AC converter is being used in or near thevehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt asoutlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisionsand rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedor improperly belted person is significantlymore likely to be injured or killed than aperson properly wearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.



WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The ignition lock is designed so the key cannot beturned to the LOCK position and removed untilthe shift selector lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

When removing the key from the ignition, makesure the shift selector lever is in the P (Park)position.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)position, the key cannot be moved to the LOCKposition.

When the key cannot be turned to the LOCKposition, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the ONposition.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector lever is designed so it cannotbe moved out of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turned to OFFposition or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector lever can be moved if theignition switch is in the ON position and thefoot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between theLOCK and ACC positions. The OFF positionis indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder.When the ignition is in the OFF position,the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwisefrom the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key tothe LOCK position. Remove the key. Tounlock the steering wheel, insert the keyand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

WSD0041

IGNITION SWITCH



KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the key. It automati-cally returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid asfrequently as possible, or at least wheneveryou refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe key is turned to the ON (3) position. See“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “Instruments and controls”section of this manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE



1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector lever cannot bemoved out of P (Park) and into any ofthe other gear positions if the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position or ifthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionkey to START. Release the key when theengine starts. If the engine starts, but fails torun, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. After

cranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the enginestarts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Alwaysdepress the brake pedal until shifting iscompleted. Failure to do so could causeyou to lose control and have anaccident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

● When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by de-pressing the accelerator pedal. The footbrake should be used for this purpose.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle iselectronically controlled to produce maximumpower and smooth operation.

STARTING THE ENGINE DRIVING THE VEHICLE



The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shiftselector lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed sothe foot brake pedal MUST be depressedbefore shifting from P (Park) to any driveposition while the ignition switch is in theON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition key is turnedto the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if thekey is removed.

To move the selector lever:

Push the button while depressing the brakepedal

Push the button to shift

Shift without pushing button

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector lever out of theP (Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position forany reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), orany D (Drive) position, the shift selector levercannot be moved to P (Park). Additionally, the keycannot be turned to the LOCK position and beremoved from the ignition switch. If this occurs,perform the following steps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle isstopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

WSD0161



4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre-ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni-tion key to the LOCK position to remove thekey.

P (Park):

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) position only when thevehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) selector position when the ve-hicle is parked or when starting the engine. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped. Thebrake pedal should be depressed to movethe selector lever from N (Neutral) or anydrive position to P (Park). Apply the parkingbrake. When parking on a hill, apply the parkingbrake first, then shift the selector lever into the P(Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use the R (Reverse) position only whenthe vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Makesure the vehicle is completely stopped beforeselecting the R (Reverse) position. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the se-lector lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) orany drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud,or for maximum engine braking on steep downhillgrades.

Do not shift into the L position at speeds above65 MPH (105 km/h). Do not exceed 65 MPH(105 km/h) in the L position.

Shift lock releaseIf the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

WSD0162



To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position while holding down the shiftlock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto-matic transmission system as soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D position —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

Fail-safeWhen the fail-safe operation occurs, please notethat the transmission will be locked in any of theforward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, turn the ignition keyOFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn thekey back to the ON position. The vehicleshould return to its normal operating con-dition. If it does not return to its normaloperating condition, have a NISSAN dealercheck the transmission and repair it if nec-essary.

Overdrive switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the transmis-sion is automatically “reset” to overdrive ON.

ON: With the engine running and theshift selector lever in the D (Drive)position, the transmission upshiftsinto Overdrive as vehicle speedincreases.

Overdrive does not engage until the enginehas reached operating temperature.

WSD0163



OFF: For driving up and down longslopes where engine braking is nec-essary push the Overdrive switchonce. The O/D OFF indicator lightin the instrument panel comes on atthis time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing agentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable shiftshocks as the transmission shifts into and out ofOverdrive repeatedly. In this case, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive off. TheO/D OFF indicator light in the instrument panelcomes on at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress theOverdrive switch to turn the Overdrive on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for ex-tended periods of time with the Overdrive off.This reduces fuel economy.

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and itwill release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

LSD0158

PARKING BRAKE



1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON·OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control switch off and have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set the cruisecontrol system, use the following proce-dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

LSD0159

CRUISE CONTROL



● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu-tral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE



● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-tion” later in this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: sA

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: sB

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: sC

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is asophisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces. Remem-ber that stopping distances on slipperysurfaces will be longer than on normalsurfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-tances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if youare using tire chains. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-sible for safety.

● Tire type and condition may also affectbraking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install thespecified size of tires on all fourwheels.

– When installing a spare tire, makesure that it is the proper size and typeas specified on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See “Tire andLoading Information label” in the“Technical and consumer informa-tion” section of this manual.

– For detailed information, see“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls thebrakes so the wheels do not lock during hardbraking or when braking on slippery surfaces.The system detects the rotation speed at eachwheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-vent each wheel from locking and sliding. Bypreventing each wheel from locking, the systemhelps the driver maintain steering control andhelps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steerthe vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5- 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more wheelsare close to locking up, the system electronicallycontrols the pressure applied to each brake.

This action is similar to pumping the brakes veryquickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brakepedal and hear a noise from under the hood orfeel a vibration from the actuator when it is oper-ating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS isoperating properly. However, the pulsation mayindicate that road conditions are hazardous andextra care is required while driving.

Self-test featureThe ABS includes electronic sensors, electricpumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. Thecomputer has a built-in diagnostic feature thattests the system each time you start the engineand move the vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, you may heara “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake



pedal. This is normal and does not indicate amalfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates theABS warning light on the instrument panel. Thebrake system then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during theself-test or while driving, have the vehiclechecked by a NISSAN dealer.

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tiremay spin or slip. With the vehicle Traction ControlSystem (TCS), sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engine output to helpimprove vehicle stability while accelerating.

● When the traction control system is operat-ing, the indicator in the instrumentpanel blinks.

● If the indicator blinks, the vehicle isunder slippery conditions. Be sure to drivecarefully. See “Slip indicator light”and “Trac-tion Control System (TCS) off indicatorlight” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

● If a malfunction occurs in the system,the and indicator lightscome on in the instrument panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction controlfunction is canceled. The vehicle will behave likea vehicle without the system.

WARNING

● The Traction Control System is de-signed to help improve driving stabilitybut does not prevent accidents due toabrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the Traction Control Systemmay not operate properly and theindicator light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, bushings andwheels are not standard equipment orare extremely deteriorated, the TractionControl System may not operate prop-erly and the indicator light maycome on.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)



● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the Traction Control System may notoperate properly and the indica-tor light may come on. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the TractionControl System may not operate prop-erly and the indicator light maycome on.

● The Traction Control System is not asubstitute for winter tires or tire chainson a snow covered road.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detectthese movements and control the braking andengine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system is operating, the SLIP indicator inthe instrument panel blinks.

● If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle DynamicControl (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-struments and controls” section.

● Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the system, theSLIP and indicator lights come on inthe instrument panel.As long as these indicator lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled.

If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system OFF using the VDC OFFswitch, VDC functions will be turned off. TheVDC system will still try to transfer power from aslipping drive wheel to one with more tractionwhen the VDC system switch is OFF. The SLIPindicator will flash if wheel spin is detected. TheABS will still operate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feela pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working prop-erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system isdesigned to help improve driving stabil-ity but does not prevent accidents dueto abrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)



● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Controlsystem may not operate properly andthe Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-tor light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,bushings and wheels are not NISSANapproved for your vehicle or are ex-tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system may not operateproperly. This could adversely affect ve-hicle handling performance, and theVDC OFF indicator light may come on.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the Vehicle Dynamic Control systemmay not operate properly and the VDCOFF indicator light may come on. Donot drive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control offindicator light may illuminate. This isnot a malfunction. Restart the engineafter driving onto a stable surface.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-namic Control system may not operateproperly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-trol off indicator light may come on.

● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.

WARNING

● Always turn and look back before back-ing up. The RSS is not a substitute forproper backing procedures.

● Read and understand the limitations ofthe rear sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather may af-fect the function of the RSS; this mayinclude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

● This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.

LSD0088

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if soequipped)



● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● If your vehicle sustains damage to therear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate measure-ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumperwhen the shift selector is in R (Reverse). Thesystem may not detect objects at speeds above 3mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angularor moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet (1.8 m)from the rear bumper with a decreased coveragearea at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer tothe illustration for approximate zone coverageareas). As you move closer to the obstacle, therate of the tone increases. When the obstacle isless than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone willsound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-ary or receding object further than 10 inches(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone

will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys-tem detects an object approaching, the tone willsound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the shiftselector lever is placed in R (Reverse) and theignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on theinstrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSSon and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition mustbe ON, and the shift selector lever in R (Reverse).An indicator light on the switch will illuminatewhen the system is turned off. If the indicator lightilluminates when the RSS is not turned off, it mayindicate a failure in the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rearbumper fascia) free from snow, ice and largeaccumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensorswith sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, itwill affect the accuracy of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.



ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

WARNING

● Do not use your engine block heaterwith an ungrounded electrical systemor a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-riously injured by an electrical shock ifyou use an ungrounded connection.

● Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord couldresult in an electrical shock and cancause serious injury.

● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plugthe extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use theproper extension cord or a groundedoutlet can result in a fire or electricalshock and cause serious personalinjury.

Engine block heaters are available throughNISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperaturestarting. The engine block heater should be usedwhen the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) orlower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine blockheater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into agrounded 3 wire, 3 pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged infor at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outsidetemperatures, to properly warm the enginecoolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn theengine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-erly store the cord to keep it away frommoving parts.



6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-12


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pressure ofall tires (except the spare tire) on the displayscreen by sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is beingdriven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressurewarning light. This system will activate only whenthe vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). For more details, refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tirepressure information” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio systems” sec-tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damagethe tires and increase the likelihood oftire failure. Serious vehicle damagecould occur and may lead to an acci-dent and could result in serious per-sonal injury. Check the tire pressure forall four tires. Adjust the tire pressure tothe recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label to turn the low tire pressurewarning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,replace it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Move the shift selector lever to P(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the automatic transmissionis shifted into P (Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools1. Tip up the passenger side second row cap-

tain’s chair. Refer to “Tip up for easy entry to3rd row” in the “Safety — seats, seat beltsand supplemental restraint system” sectionof this owner’s manual.

2. Lift up the floor carpeting and remove thejack.

WCE0044 LCE0078

In case of emergency 6-3


3. Stow the center tray table (if so equipped).

4. Move both front seats as forward as pos-sible.

5. Lift up the floor carpeting s1 . Remove thespare tire cover s2 and jack tool kit.

6. Turn the retainer counterclockwise and re-move the spare tire.

Removing wheel cover (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheelcaps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-sult in personal injury.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover orwheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

LCE0079

WSD0085



● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the twonotches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

WCE0081



Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ,sE ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display of the tire pres-sure information may show higher pres-sure than the COLD tire pressure after thevehicle has been driven more than 1 mile(1.6 km). This is because the tire pressureincreases as the tire temperature rises.This does not indicate a system malfunc-tion.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

WCE0056



● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING



WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnec-essary electrical systems (lights, heater, airconditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WCE0054



CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannotbe push-started or tow-started. Attempt-ing to do so may cause transmissiondamage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toP (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the front wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the rear wheelsraised always use towing dollies underthe front wheels.

● When towing with the front wheels ontowing dollies:

– Turn the ignition key to the OFF po-sition, and secure the steering wheelin a straight-ahead position with arope or similar device. Never securethe steering wheel by turning the ig-nition key to the LOCK position. Thismay damage the steering lockmechanism.

– Move the gearshift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

● When towing automatic with the rearwheels on the ground (if you do not usetowing dollies): Always release theparking brake.

WSD0086

WSD0087



VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Front

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequipped). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow the vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.

WCE0120



7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect theirappearance, and also could cause themnot to function properly. Always checkwith your car wash to confirm that acidis not used.

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily with anoil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3


Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

WAI0006

CLEANING INTERIOR



SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

TemperatureHigh temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollutionIndustrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5


CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.



8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23Keyfob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checkingthe tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten ifnecessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)transmitter components Replace the grom-met seal, valve core and cap of the transmitter invehicles equipped with TPMS at tire replacementwhen reaching the wear limit of the tires.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) positionmechanism On a fairly steep hill check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selector lever inthe P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines onthe reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At theend of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selectorlever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may comeon at any time without warning, even ifthe ignition key is in the OFF positionand the engine is not running. To avoidinjury, always disconnect the negativebattery cable before working near thefan.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models, the fuelfilter or fuel lines should be serviced bya NISSAN dealer because the fuel linesare under high pressure even when theengine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Air cleaner4. Brake fluid reservoir5. Battery6. Fuse/fusible link box7. Transmission dipstick8. Engine oil dipstick9. Radiator cap10. Drive belt location11. Fuse block12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir13. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0515

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freezesolution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.Additional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

LDI0350

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

LDI0351 WDI0175

ENGINE OIL



CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap sA by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plugsB .

5. Remove the drain plug sB with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

WDI0493



7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.


3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter sA .

4. Loosen the oil filter sA with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of theengine. Failure to do so could lead toengine failure.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

WDI0495



When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

● Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic KATF will cause deterioration in drive-ability and automatic transmission du-rability, and may damage the automatictransmission, which is not covered bythe NISSAN new vehicle limitedwarranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is alsodescribed on caution labels located in the enginecompartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add GenuineNISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill throughthe opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.● Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can damagethe brake system and affect the vehi-cle’s stopping ability.

● Be sure to clean the filler cap beforeremoving.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

WDI0256

5-SPEED AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID



BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.



WDI0512 LDI0355

WINDOW WASHER FLUID



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.Clean the battery with a solution of bakingsoda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

WDI0224

BATTERY



2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Crankshaft3. Idler pulley4. Generator5. Air conditioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position before servicing drive belt.The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusualwear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt isin poor condition or is loose, have it replacedor adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

LDI0302

WDI0644

DRIVE BELT



2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped sAspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS



The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe theinside of the air cleaner filter housing and thecover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

s1 Loosen the screw.

s2 Disconnect the electrical connector.

s3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleanercover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.

LDI0357

AIR CLEANER



CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0194

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



Be careful not to let anything get into the washernozzle sA . This may cause clogging or improperwindshield washer operation. If something getsinto the nozzle, remove it with a needle or smallpin sB .

WDI0337



Rear window wiper blade

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win-dow.

s2 Push the wiper blade in and pivot until theblade becomes free.

s3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm andsnap into place.

LDI0356



If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

LDI0358

BRAKES FUSES



3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a newfuse sB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

WDI0452 LDI0516



2. Pull the sunglasses holder down to open s1 .

3. Pull up on the sunglasses holder s2 andremove to expose the fuse panel.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with anequivalent good fuse sB .

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Type AWDI0452

Type BLDI0456



CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallowthe battery and removed parts.

KEYFOB

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

s1 Open the lid using a coin sA .

s2 Remove the battery sB .

s3 Install a new battery sC with the “+” facingdown.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding thebattery across the contact points will seri-ously deplete the storage capacity.

LDI0484

BATTERY REPLACEMENT



● Do not touch the internal circuit and electricterminals as it could cause a malfunction.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

s4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then thebutton two or three times to check the key-fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5.

● An improperly disposed battery canhurt the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

● The keyfob is water-resistant; how-ever, if it does get wet, immediatelywipe completely dry.

● The operational range of the keyfobextends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)from the vehicle. This range may varywith conditions.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTSReplacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Ifreplacement is required, see your NISSANdealer.

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

LIGHTS



● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Low beam:Wattage: 51Bulb no.: 9006*

High beam:Wattage: 60Bulb no.: 9005*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the head-light reflector for a long period of timeas dust, moisture and smoke may enterthe headlight body and affect the per-formance of the headlight.

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of theexterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. Atemperature difference between the inside andthe outside of the lens causes the fog. This is nota malfunction. If large drops of water collectinside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● When handling the bulb, do not touchthe glass envelope.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Wattage 55 Bulb No. H11*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.

● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog lightfor a long period of time as dust, mois-ture and smoke may enter the fog lightbody and affect the performance of thefog light.

● DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BAREHANDS.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. Remove the three splash shield screws andmove the splash shield out of the way.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector.

WDI0522



4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re-move.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the foglight assembly. Do not shake or rotate thebulb when removing it. Do not touch theglass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assemblyHigh 60 HB3/9005Low* 51 HB4/9006Park/Turn* 8/29 3457Cornering* 27 3156

Front fog light 55 H11Puddle lamp* 8 —Room/map lights 8 PLW 578Personal lights

Type A 8 2GL T2PType B 8 TS578

Footwell 3.4 158Glove box light 3.4 158Vanity mirror light* 1.32 —Step light 3.8 194Cargo light 7 N1JHigh-mounted stop light* 13 912Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 7/27 3157KBackup (reversing) 18 921KTurn 27 3156K

License plate light* 5 W5W

* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.



1. Room/map light2. Front personal lights3. Step light4. Puddle lamp5. High-mounted stoplight6. Cargo light7. License plate light8. Rear combination light9. Headlight assembly10. Fog light

Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installationLDI0360

WDI0263



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.Room/map lights

LDI0517

Personal lights – Type ALDI0364

Personal lights – Type BLDI0365



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.Step light

LDI0341

Cargo lightLDI0366

Rear combination lightLDI0367



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pres-

sure of all tires (except the spare tire) onthe display screen by sending a signalfrom a sensor that is installed in eachwheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure informa-tion” in the “Display screen, heater, airconditioner and audio and phone sys-tems” section, “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification labelor the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.The Tire and Loading Information label isaffixed to the driver side center pillar. Tirepressures should be checked regularlybecause:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WDI0210

WHEELS AND TIRES



WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-tion label. The vehicle weight ca-pacity is indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped). Do not load your ve-hicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result inreduced tire life, unsafe operat-ing conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-ure, loss of control and possibleinjury.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.



Tire and loading information label

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

s4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

s6 Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped).

LDI0518



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original Tire:P225/65/R16P225/60/R17

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:P225/65/R16P225/60/R17

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire:T135/80D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

LDI0393Example

WDI0394



s1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0395



s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Depart-ment Of Transportation.9 The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of Tire Identification Num-ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

s6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

ExampleWDI0396



s7 The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.


● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to theoriginal equipment tires. If you do not, it canadversely affect the safety and handling of yourvehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.



For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installingstudded tires. Skid and traction capabilities ofstudded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINSUse of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenrecommended by the tire chain manufacturer toensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive

at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Michelin PAXsystem, contact your NISSAN dealer for the tirechains that will fit the PAX tire. The tire chainselection is limited due to the PAX system tiresize.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258



Wheel nut tightening torque:83 ft-lb (112 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


WDI0259



Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.



● Do not install a damaged or deformedwheel or tire even if it has been re-paired. Such wheels or tires could havestructural damage and could fail with-out warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .



Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.

● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.



9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-25Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1

Engine oil *7Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2• Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter change 3-7/8 qt 3-1/4 qt 3.7

Cooling systemWith reservoir 2-3/4 gal 2-3/8 gal 10.5 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF *3

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper level according to the instructions inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.*8

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent *4

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6

Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6

Windshield washer fluid (shared betweenfront and rear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze orequivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic K ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the auto-

matic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*4: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.*8: See your NISSAN dealer for service.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre-mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc-tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline isnot available you may use unleaded regular gaso-line with an octane rating of at least 87 AKInumber (Research octane number 91), but youmay notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are speciallydesigned to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSANsupports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-gests that you use reformulated gasoline whenavailable.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygen-ates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with orwithout advertising their presence. NISSAN doesnot recommend the use of fuels of which the oxy-genate content and the fuel compatibility for yourNISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt,ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3


E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See 9Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants9 earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosityThe engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oilviscosity other than that recommended couldcause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0183



Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.



ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.5 (3,498)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.A/T (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug Standard PLFR5A-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

16 x 6.5JJ

17 x 6.5JJ

Tires

P225/65R16

P225/60R17

Spare tire T135/80*16

Speed rating 16” H

17” H

*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 204.13(5,185)

Overall width in (mm) 78.1 (1,983)

Overall height

with roof rack in (mm) 71.2 (1,809)

without roof rack in (mm) 70.0 (1,778)

Front Track in (mm) 67.32(1,710)

Rear Track in (mm) 67.32(1,710)

Wheelbase in (mm) 124.02(3,150)

Gross vehicle weightrating

lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label”on the center pillar be-tween the driver’s sidefront and side doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

LTI0077 WTI0166

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0049 LTI0078 WTI0168



TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

LTI0084 WTI0167

WTI0165

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE



Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm thatthe following parts are enclosed in the plasticbag:

● License plate bracket

● License plate bracket screws x 2

● License plate screws x 2

● Screw grommets x 2

1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia atthe location marks (small dimples) using a0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging thearea behind the fascia, apply only light pres-sure to the drill.

2. Insert the grommets into the holes in thebumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver intothe grommet hole to turn the threaded part ofthe grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using thetwo longer screws.

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws tomount the license plate to the license platebracket.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152



5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.



WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem must be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR) should not exceed the value specifiedin the following “Towing Load/Specification”chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0164

TOWING A TRAILER



Temperature conditions can also affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The engineprotection mode, which helps reduce the chanceof engine damage, could activate and automati-cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed maydecrease under high load. Plan your trip carefullyto account for trailer and vehicle load, weatherand road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and vehicle speed. The reducedspeed may be lower than other traffic,which could increase the chance of a col-lision. Be especially careful when driving.Pull to the side of the road to a safe area.Allow the engine to cool and return tonormal operation. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “In case of emergency”section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent ofthe total trailer load within the maximum tongueload limits shown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

WTI0160 TI1012M



Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity, usethe following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the9Towing Load/Specification9 chart foundlater in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 5,517 lb. (2502 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -5,820 lb. (2640 kg).

● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)from “Towing Load/Specification9 chart -8,500 lb. (3856 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “TowingLoad/Specification9 chart - 3,500 lb. (1587kg).

5,820 lb. (2640 kg) GVWR

– 5,517 lb. (2502 kg) GVW

= 303 lb. (138 kg) Available for tongueweight

8,500 lb. (3856 kg) GCWR

– 5,517 lb. (2502 kg) GVW

= 2,983 lb. (1354 kg) Capacity available fortowing

303 lb. (138 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 2,983 lb. (1354 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight



The available towing capacity may be less thanthe maximum towing capacity due to the passen-ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight. If the tongueload becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo toobtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the10 - 15% tongue weight specification even if thecalculated available tongue weight is greaterthan 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is lessthan 10% , reduce the total trailer weight tomatch the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are withinthe required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

Maximum Towing Load*1

3,500 (1,588)

Maximum Tongue Load 350 (158)

Gross CombinedWeight Rating

8,500 (3,856)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculatedassuming a base vehicle with driver and anyoptions required to achieve the rating. Additionalpassengers, cargo and/or optional equipment

will add weight to the vehicle and reduce yourvehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitchChoose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available fromyour NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle, to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specificweight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-pable of towing a trailer heavier than theweight rating of the hitch components.Never exceed the weight rating of thehitch components. Doing so can causeserious personal injury or propertydamage.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffetingcaused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-dling. Sway control devices may be used to helpcontrol these affects. If you choose to use one,contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to makesure the sway control device will work with thevehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-tem. Follow the instructions provided by themanufacturer for installing and using the swaycontrol device.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).



Class II hitchClass II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,510 kg).

CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

● The hitch should not be attached to oraffect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thereceiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer. A genuine NISSAN trailer towharness is available from your NISSAN dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.



WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.

● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.



4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When going up a long grade, downshift thetransmission to a lower gear and reducespeed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating. However, forlong steep grades, do not stay in 1st gearwhen driving above 35 MPH (56 km/h) or2nd gear when driving above 58 MPH (93km/h).

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the ve-hicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Downshift the transmission to a lower gearfor engine braking when driving down steepor long hills. This will help slow the vehiclewithout applying the brakes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not useoverdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

● Do not use cruise control while towing atrailer.



● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oilshould be replaced and transmissionoil/fluid should be changed more fre-quently. For additional information, see the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectionearlier in this manual.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Automatic TransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with an automatictransmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUSTbe placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY



If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9 If theMIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9 con-dition, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.


10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data that will assist in understand-ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDRis designed to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in thisvehicle is designed to record such data as:

● How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating;

● Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened;

● How far (if at all) the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

● How fast the vehicle was traveling.

● Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded byyour vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have the special equip-ment, can read the information if they have ac-cess to the vehicle or the EDR. The EDR datamay be retrieved during routine vehicle servicingor for special research. It might also be accessedwith the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, inresponse to a request by law enforcement, or asotherwise required or permitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS



A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood DriveStrongsville, OH 441491-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood DriveStrongsville, OH 441491-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONUnfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its

resale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).



10 Index

A

Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact airbag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59Side and curtain(See supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag system) . . . .1-63

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-10Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-33Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-40Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-42Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-14Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-8

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-18Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-59Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-53FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50MP3 display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-62

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-25Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-38Automatic transmission position indicatorlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Driving with automatic transmission. . . . .5-8Transmission selector lever lockrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-23Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

B

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-18Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7

Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Bench seat adjustment (3rd row) . . . .1-7, 1-12Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24BluetoothT hands-free phone system . . . . .4-75Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-47Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-18Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-26Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-13, 8-20Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-12Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Brightness/contrast button . . . .4-6, 4-16, 4-28Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Captain’s chair adjustment (2nd row). . . . . .1-6Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61


CD changer (See audio system). . . . . . . .4-59CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-53Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-30Child restraints . . . . . . .1-17, 1-18, 1-26, 1-28

Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-41, 1-47Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-30

Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-9Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-26(models without navigation system) . .4-5, 4-16

Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-16, 4-26C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-53Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Control panel buttons

Brightness/contrast button . .4-6, 4-16, 4-28Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-18Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-17Setting button . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-11, 4-22Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-8, 4-18With navigation system. . . . . . . . . . .4-17Without navigation system . . . . . . .4-2, 4-7

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-62Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-40Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-42

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-33, 2-34Curtain side-impact air bag system(See supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . .1-63

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Digital video disc DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-65Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-21Display controls(see control panel buttons) . . . . .4-2, 4-7, 4-17Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-9, 4-19Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Door open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . .3-25Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Driving with automatic transmission. . . . .5-8Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

DVD entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . .4-65

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-24Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-7Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-9Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

English/metric setting . . . . . . .4-5, 4-15, 4-25Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-17Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

10-2


F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-23Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-59Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-19

Fuel economy setting . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-8, 4-19Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Garment hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31

H

Hands-free phone system, BluetoothT . . . .4-75Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-23Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8

Active Head Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-18Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Headphones(See DVD entertainment system) . . . . . . .4-68Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Heater

Heater and air conditionercontrols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-40Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-32, 4-41

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-42HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-44Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-7Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-23Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-21Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-21Interior lights(see Lights on demand switch) . . . . . . . .2-41ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-23

10-3


Keyless entry system(See remote keyless entry system) . . . . . . .3-9

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-10Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-66

Language setting . . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-15, 4-25LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-11Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-10Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-26Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-7Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-18Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-18Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-9Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-10Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-60

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

LightsMap lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43

Lights on demand switch. . . . . . . . . . . .2-41Lock

Child safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . .3-9Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-19Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-9Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-10Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

Main ON/OFF switch(for power doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-15Maintenance

Changing the maintenanceinterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-20Displaying the maintenance noticereminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10, 4-20General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Resetting the maintenanceinterval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10, 4-20Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-25

Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-19Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-21Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-23Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

N

NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-7

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11

10-4


OverheatIf your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-27Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-12Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Phone, BluetoothT hands-free system . . . .4-75Power

Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-41, 1-47Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-15Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . . . .1-64Programmable features . . . . . .4-5, 4-11, 4-22Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-75Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-59FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-56FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-62

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Rear audio controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . .2-25Rear view monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Rear window wiper and washer switches. . .2-17Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Remote controller (See DVD entertainmentsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67Remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . .3-9Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-25Resetting average speed . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Resetting the fuel economy . . . . .4-4, 4-9, 4-19Resetting trip 1 and trip 2. . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-18

S

SafetyChild safety sliding door lock . . . . . . . .3-9Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-26, 1-41, 1-47Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25

Screen (See DVD entertainment system) . . .4-67Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4Second row captain’s chair . . . . . . . . .1-6Third row bench seat . . . . . . . . .1-7, 1-12

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-18Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-15Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19Pre-tensioner seat belt system. . . . . . .1-64Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-24Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-19

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-25Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2

Second row captain’s chair adjustment. . . . .1-6

10-5


Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-7Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Setting button . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-11, 4-22Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Shifting

Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-24Side air bag system (See supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag system) . .1-63SkyView™ roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Sliding door

Manual sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Sliding door locksChild safety sliding door locks. . . . . . . .3-9

SonarRear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-7Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Steering

Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-62

Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32, 2-35, 2-35Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . .1-66Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-66, 2-10Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-59Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-66Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-52Supplemental side and curtain side-impactair bag system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-38Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-23Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-18Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-18Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6Lights on demand switch. . . . . . . . . .2-41Main ON/OFF switch(for power doors) . . . . . . . . . . .3-6, 3-15Overdrive switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . .2-25Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Traction control system (TCS) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-16

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-7Third row bench seat adjustment. . . . .1-7, 1-12Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-40Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-23Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-9

Tire pressure display . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-11, 4-21Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3

10-6


Tire rotation maintenancereminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-11, 4-21Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-30Towing

Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-25Transceiver

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-44Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission. . . . .5-8Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-10

Travel (See registering your vehicle inanother country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-8, 4-18Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-23

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-25Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-20Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . .4-14, 4-24Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle security system(NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15, 3-2, 5-7Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-66, 2-10Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-8Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . . .2-8Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-9Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-23Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-9Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-10Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-60Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-14Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-66Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-16

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-37Manual vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Power vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-16Wiper

Rear window wiper and washerswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-16Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17

10-7


RECOMMENDED FUEL:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octanerating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-ber (Research octane number 91).

NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least91 AKI number (Research octane number 96). Ifpremium unleaded gasoline is not available youmay use regular unleaded gasoline with an oc-tane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Researchoctane number 91), but you may notice a de-crease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● Engine oil with API Certification Mark

● Viscosity 5W-30

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver sidecenter pillar or on the driver’s door. For additionalinformation, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION


1. Engine oil 8-8

2. Window washer fluid 8-12

3. Engine coolant 8-7

4. Power steering fluid 8-11

5. Meters and gauges 2-3

6. Audio system 4-43;Climate controls 4-31,4-40

7. Spare tire 6-2

8. Fuel-filler door release 3-19;Fuel recommendation 9-3

9. Keys 3-2

10. Seat belts 1-15

11. Front seats 1-2

12. Hood release 3-14

13. Brake fluid 8-12

14. Battery 8-13

15. Automatic transmission fluid 8-11

WGS0029

QUICK REFERENCE


2008 quest owner's manual

Automotive

vehicle features

nissan dealership

warningall information

findwarningsome information

addiimportant information

growing family of new

vehiclesthis manual

manualthis manual